2018 Flex

User Manual: Pdf 2018-flex

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 508 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 FLEX Owner’s Manual
February 2018
Second Printing
Owner’s Manual
Flex
Litho in U.S.A.
JA8J 19A321 AA
owner.ford.com ford.ca
2018 FLEX Owner’s Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201801 20180105201236
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................7
Data Recording .................................................9
California Proposition 65 .............................11
Perchlorate ........................................................11
Ford Credit .........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................13
Export Unique Options .................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................15
At a Glance
Instrument Panel Overview .......................16
Child Safety
General Information ......................................18
Installing Child Restraints ...........................19
Booster Seats .................................................29
Child Restraint Positioning .........................31
Child Safety Locks .........................................32
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation .................................34
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................35
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................38
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................39
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................39
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ................................................41
Seatbelt Extension ........................................41
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™.........................43
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation .................................44
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................45
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........46
Side Airbags ....................................................48
Safety Canopy™...........................................49
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......50
Airbag Disposal ...............................................51
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................52
Remote Control .............................................53
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................56
MyKey™
Principle of Operation ..................................57
Creating a MyKey ..........................................58
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................59
Checking MyKey System Status .............60
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems .........................................................61
MyKey Troubleshooting ...............................61
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................63
Keyless Entry ..................................................66
Liftgate
Manual Liftgate .............................................69
Power Liftgate ................................................70
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................73
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................74
1
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................75
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................76
Audio Control ..................................................76
Voice Control ...................................................77
Cruise Control ..................................................77
Information Display Control .......................77
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................77
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals ....................................79
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers .......................................80
Autowipers ......................................................80
Windshield Washers .....................................81
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ...........81
Lighting
General Information .....................................82
Lighting Control .............................................82
Autolamps .......................................................83
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................84
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................84
Daytime Running Lamps ...........................84
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................85
Direction Indicators ......................................85
Interior Lamps ................................................85
Ambient Lighting ..........................................86
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................87
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................88
Interior Mirror ..................................................90
Sun Visors ........................................................90
Moonroof .........................................................90
Instrument Cluster
Gauges ..............................................................92
Warning Lamps and Indicators ................93
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............96
Information Displays
General Information .....................................97
Information Messages ...............................105
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control .............................114
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD ..................115
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System ......................116
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
..........................................................................118
Rear Passenger Climate Controls .........120
Heated Windows and Mirrors ...................121
Cabin Air Filter ...............................................122
Remote Start .................................................122
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................123
Head Restraints ............................................123
Manual Seats ................................................126
Power Seats ...................................................126
Memory Function ........................................128
Rear Seats ......................................................129
Heated Seats ................................................136
Climate Controlled Seats ..........................137
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ..............138
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................143
2
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Table of Contents
Storage Compartments
Center Console .............................................145
Overhead Console ......................................146
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ...................................147
Ignition Switch ..............................................147
Keyless Starting ............................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine ......................148
Engine Block Heater ....................................151
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions ......................................153
Fuel Quality ....................................................153
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................154
Running Out of Fuel ...................................154
Refueling .........................................................156
Fuel Consumption ......................................158
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................160
Catalytic Converter ......................................161
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ..........................164
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive ...............................168
Brakes
General Information ....................................175
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................176
Parking Brake .................................................176
Traction Control
Principle of Operation .................................177
Using Traction Control ................................177
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ................................178
Using Stability Control ...............................179
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ...............................180
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................180
Active Park Assist .........................................181
Rear View Camera ......................................185
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation ...............................189
Using Cruise Control ..................................189
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............190
Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System .............196
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................198
Steering ...........................................................201
Collision Warning System ........................201
Load Carrying
Cargo Nets ....................................................204
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............204
Load Limit .....................................................204
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................210
Trailer Sway Control .....................................211
Recommended Towing Weights .............211
Essential Towing Checks ..........................213
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......216
Driving Hints
Breaking-In .....................................................218
Economical Driving .....................................218
Driving Through Water ...............................219
Floor Mats .......................................................219
3
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Table of Contents
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ..................................221
Hazard Flashers ...........................................222
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................222
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................223
Post-Crash Alert System .........................225
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................225
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ..............227
In California (U.S. Only) ............................228
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .....................229
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................230
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................230
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
........................................................................232
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
........................................................................232
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
........................................................................232
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart .........................234
Changing a Fuse ..........................................243
Maintenance
General Information ..................................245
Opening and Closing the Hood .............245
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec
........................................................................246
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................247
Engine Oil Dipstick .....................................249
Engine Oil Check .........................................249
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................250
Engine Coolant Check ..............................250
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................254
Brake Fluid Check .......................................256
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................257
Washer Fluid Check ....................................257
Changing the 12V Battery .........................257
Checking the Wiper Blades ....................259
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................259
Adjusting the Headlamps .......................260
Removing a Headlamp ..............................261
Changing a Bulb ...........................................261
Bulb Specification Chart .........................265
Changing the Engine Air Filter ................267
Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................268
Cleaning Products ......................................268
Cleaning the Exterior .................................268
Waxing ............................................................270
Cleaning the Engine ...................................270
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................270
Cleaning the Interior ....................................271
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................271
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................272
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............273
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................273
Vehicle Storage ............................................273
Body Styling Kits .........................................275
Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................276
Tire Care .........................................................278
Using Snow Chains ....................................292
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........293
Changing a Road Wheel ..........................296
Technical Specifications .........................300
4
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Table of Contents
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Duratec
........................................................................302
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................302
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec ............303
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™.....305
Vehicle Identification Number ..............306
Vehicle Certification Label ......................307
Transmission Code Designation ...........307
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec ......................................................308
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................312
Audio System
General Information ....................................317
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio ............................318
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD .........................................................323
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD .................................................................324
USB Port .........................................................325
SYNC™
General Information ..................................326
Using Voice Recognition ..........................328
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ............331
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......344
SYNC™ AppLink™....................................346
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................347
SYNC™ Troubleshooting .........................357
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................365
Home Screen ................................................377
Using Voice Recognition ..........................379
Entertainment .............................................386
Climate ...........................................................396
Phone .............................................................399
Navigation .....................................................404
Apps ..................................................................412
Settings ...........................................................415
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................430
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................443
Ford Protect
Ford Protect .................................................445
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information .......447
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........450
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................453
Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........455
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............465
End User License Agreement .................467
5
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Table of Contents
6
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
8
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
Note operating instructions
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact
information), to offer you products or
services that may interest you. Data may
be provided to our service providers such
as part suppliers that may help diagnose
malfunctions, and who are similarly
obligated to protect data. We retain this
9
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
data only as long as necessary to perform
these functions or to comply with law. We
may provide information where required
in response to official requests to law
enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with
lawful authority or court order, and such
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by Ford
Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 326).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
•How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
•Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
10
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 326).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 326).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
11
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us, and to manage your
account.
Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to Account Manager, go to
www.ford.com/finance.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
see the Warranty Manual that is provided
to you along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
12
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING
Do not connect wireless plug-in
devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
13
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor
Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
15
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
E232260
Air vent.A
Wiper lever. See Windshield
Wipers (page 80).
B
Direction Indicators. See
Direction Indicators (page 85).
C
Information display control. See
Information Display Control
(page 77).
D
Instrument cluster. See Gauges
(page 92).
E
Information display control. See
Information Display Control
(page 77).
F
Audio system. See Audio
System (page 317).
G
Hazard flasher switch. See
Hazard Flashers (page 222).
H
Information and entertainment
display.
I
Passenger airbag indicator light.
See Front Passenger Sensing
System (page 46).
J
Climate controls. See Climate
Control (page 114).
K
Keyless start button. See
Keyless Starting (page 147).
L
Audio control. See Audio
Control (page 76).
M
Horn.N
Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 76).
O
16
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
At a Glance
Cruise control switches. See
Using Cruise Control (page
189).
P
Hood release. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 245).
Q
Instrument panel dimmer
control. See Instrument
Lighting Dimmer (page 84).
R
Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 82).
S
17
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
WARNINGS
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
On hot days, the temperature inside
the vehicle can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
18
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
•You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 46).
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
19
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Properly restrain
children 12 and under in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
•Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
restraint and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
•For second-row seating positions,
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
child restraint fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
•For third-row seating positions, stow
the head restraints to improve child
restraint fit. See Head Restraints
(page 123).
•Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
20
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Standard seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
21
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle provides extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
22
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Inflatable seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
23
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
24
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Do not attach two child safety
restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seatback and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether
anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
attach the top tether strap to the proper
top tether anchor if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child restraint.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
Second-row bucket seats and third-row
passenger side
E190825
25
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Second-row bench seats and third-row
passenger side
E190826
E144054
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in
(52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm)
center to center. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
the center seating position. You can only
use LATCH compatible child restraints
(with attachments on belt webbing) at
this seating position provided that the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child restraint is
attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
26
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once you install the child safety seat using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Second row bucket seats and third row
passenger side
E190827
Second row bench seats and third row
passenger side
E190828
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
E190829
27
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Placement of the tether strap
•Second row outboard seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seatback, under the head
restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If needed, remove the
head restraint to improve the fit of the
child safety seat or tether strap.
•Second row center seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, remove the head restraint to
improve the fit of the child safety seat
or tether strap. See Head Restraints
(page 123).
•Third row seat position: Route the child
safety seat tether strap over the
seatback, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down
to improve the fit of the child safety
seat or tether strap. See Head
Restraints (page 123).
1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be
twisted ½ turn to improve installation.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly,
the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a
crash.
E190833
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
Second row bucket (40/40)
E190830
28
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
Second row bench (60/40)
E190831
Third row seat
E190832
Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Do not put the shoulder section of
the seatbelt or allow the child to put
the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they
reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
29
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
E142595
•Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
30
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
31
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
123).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
32
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
33
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
Children must always be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific seatbelt assembly
made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.
WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Seatbelts and seats may be hot in a
vehicle that is in the sunshine. The
hot seatbelts or seats may burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
•Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
•Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt
and rear inflatable seatbelt).
•Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
•Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
•Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
E71880
•Seatbelt warning light and chime.
E67017
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The seatbelt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the seatbelts firmly
34
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the seatbelts. In frontal
crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a click and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and properly fasten
your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142590
35
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in a crash,
have the seatbelts and associated
components inspected as soon as
possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seat belts have both
the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in
a rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 18).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
36
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
seatbelt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second
row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire
belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
•An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
•Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
50).
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
WARNING
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
37
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,
some side impact crashes and rollovers.
The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt
did not inflate in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.
Stowing the Rear Inflatable Seatbelt
The rear inflatable seatbelt has a snap
retainer for stowing the seatbelt against
the quarter trim panel when it is not in use.
This prevents the seatbelt tongue from
rattling against the side of the seat and
keeps it out of the way when folding or
tumbling the second row seats.
E209845
Press the retainer on the seatbelt onto the
mating snap to stow. To use the seatbelt,
pull it away from the quarter trim panel.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
38
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E209844
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
39
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear
your safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if you have
previously disabled the Belt-Minder, it will
be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See
MyKey™ (page 57). .
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
•The parking brake is set.
•The transmission is in park (P).
•The ignition is off.
•The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 20 seconds.
40
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
•This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
•This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 268).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Ford Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an
extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
Never use seatbelt extensions to
install child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over
the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
41
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.
42
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
•Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
•Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and safety
belt usage sensors.
•Driver seat position sensor.
•Front passenger sensing system.
•Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
•Front crash severity sensors.
•Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
•Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
•The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
43
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Do not place your arms on the airbag
cover or through the steering wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
Objects could become projectiles during
airbag deployment or in a sudden stop.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNINGS
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
44
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place your arms on the airbag
cover or through the steering wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
Objects could become projectiles during
airbag deployment or in a sudden stop.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
•Driver and passenger airbag modules.
•Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
45
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system. This could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E253275
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled).
46
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The indicator lamp is in the center stack of
the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
off and on indicator lamps illuminate for a
short period of time when you first switch
the ignition on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
•When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the off lamp and stays lit
to remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
•If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the on lamp, then
switch the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
•When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp and remains
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
•Switch the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in the full
upright position.
•Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
•Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
•If the indicator off lamp remains lit
even after this, advise the person to
ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
47
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Occupant
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator off light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 50).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
227).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
48
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
•Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
•Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
50).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
49
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
•Safety canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).
Always properly restrain children 12 years
old and under in the rear seats. The Safety
Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child
or booster seat because it is designed to
inflate downward from the headliner above
the doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, the
Safety Canopy and rear inflatable safety
belts. Based on the type of crash, the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
50
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
•The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
•The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal, side
and rollover crashes.
•The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
•The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
and when a certain likelihood of
rollover is detected by the rollover
sensor. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
51
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
•This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
•weather conditions
•nearby radio towers
•structures around the vehicle
•other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters,
such as amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote
controls and alarm systems may operate
on the same frequency as your remote
control. If other transmitters are operating
on those frequencies, you may not be able
to use your remote control. Using your
remote control near some types of
electronic equipment, such as USB devices,
computers or cell phones can interfere with
remote operation. Operating your remote
control near metal or metallic-finished
purses, bags or clothing can interfere with
remote operation. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
•You touch the inside of any exterior
door handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity
of an intelligent access key.
•You press the luggage compartment
button.
•You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 53).
52
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)
E210695
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. You can also use the key
blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
E163047
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: A three-button remote control
operates similarly.
E138616
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. You can also use the
key blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the
key blade, then pull the blade out.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
53
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
E235202
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Carefully remove the rubber gasket
from the transmitter if it does not come
off with the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery.
E235203
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key
1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
54
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
The horn sounds and the direction
indicators flash. We recommend you use
this method to locate your vehicle, rather
than using the panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be configured to operate when the
vehicle is remote started. See Automatic
Climate Control (page 115).
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if
any of the following occur:
•The ignition is on.
•The anti-theft alarm triggers.
•You switch off the feature.
•The hood is open.
•The transmission is not in park (P).
•The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
•The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was
driven.
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To start your vehicle remotely:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
55
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the push button ignition switch on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the remote start up to a maximum of 35
minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory settings for the driver seat, power
mirrors, power steering column and power
adjustable foot pedals. Press the unlock
button on the remote control or unlock
your vehicle with the intelligent access key
to recall the memory positions. You can
program the remote control or intelligent
access key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 128).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 73).
56
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
•Create a MyKey.
•Program configurable MyKey settings.
•Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
•The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
•Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
•Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
•Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
•A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
57
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
MyKey™
•Various vehicle speed reminders so you
know when your vehicle approaches
the limits. Warnings appear in the
information display and an audible
warning sounds when you exceed the
limit.
•Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
•Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with
a push-button start, place the key fob into
the backup slot. The location of your
backup slot is in another chapter. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 148).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the arrow
keys to get to the following menu
selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:
58
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
MyKey™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 97).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow button.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the instrument cluster
displays the following message.
Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
59
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 97).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
60
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. •The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
•Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 73).
•SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
61
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 73).
I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. •The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
•An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
•The key system has been reset.
•An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
62
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E224861
A
B
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when
you press the unlock button once. All door
mode unlocks all doors when you press
the unlock button once. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
Locking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
Unlocking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you will only
turn off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.
63
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Doors and Locks
Opening a Rear Door From the
Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.
The system will not function if:
•Your vehicle battery has no charge.
•The key battery has no charge.
•The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 53).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248555
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248556
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button
on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
See Manual Liftgate (page 69).
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.
64
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Doors and Locks
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by either:
•Using the keyless entry keypad with the
driver door closed.
•Pressing the lock button on the remote
control even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, transmission in park
(P) and the ignition off, the system will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment after you close
the last door. If the system finds a key, all
of the doors will immediately unlock and
the horn sounds twice, indicating that a
key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all doors by:
•Using the keyless entry keypad.
•Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
•Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
•The ignition is on.
•The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
•All doors are closed.
•The ignition is on.
•You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
•Your vehicle attains a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all
of the following occur:
•The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
•Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory.
•You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors will not
autounlock.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
To enable or disable autounlock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn
sounds indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.
65
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Doors and Locks
6. Press the power door lock control and
within five seconds, press the power
door unlock control. The horn sounds
once if disabled or twice if enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn
sounds indicating programming is
complete.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
•The ignition is on.
•You press the remote control lock
button.
•25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
•You switch them on with the lighting
control.
•Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
•25 seconds have elapsed.
•You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition switched on and
the engine is not running, the battery saver
will turn the ignition off when it detects a
certain amount of battery drain, or after
45 minutes have elapsed.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the
following:
•Lock or unlock the doors.
•Program and erase user codes.
•Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
•Recall memory seat and mirror
positions.
66
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Doors and Locks
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must press each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for
step 4:
•Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
•Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
•Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
•Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Hints:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
•The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
•Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
•Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 3, 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any
of the following occur:
•One minute of keypad inactivity.
•You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
•You switch your vehicle on.
•You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.
67
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Doors and Locks
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 63).
68
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Doors and Locks
MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
E138632
Press the button in the top of the liftgate
pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, then
pull on the outside handle.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Closing the Liftgate
E268796
Handles are inside the liftgate to help with
closing.
69
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Liftgate
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate or
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
If there is a problem with the open or close
request, a tone sounds for one of the
following reasons:
•The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
•The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
•The liftgate is not fully closed and your
vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight from
the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to
close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
for example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
With the transmission in park
(P), press the button on the
instrument panel.
70
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Liftgate
Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E138632
2. Press the button located in the top of
the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when using
the rear switch.
E244708
Press and release the liftgate control
button in the rear cargo area.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
•Pressing the liftgate control button.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
reverses to open. Once your remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
71
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Liftgate
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.
72
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Liftgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
73
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Security
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
•Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
•Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
74
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 123).
E261582
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
•Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
•Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 128).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 97).
75
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Steering Wheel
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 123).
E259854
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E259855
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E173608
Seek up and down or next.A
Media.B
Volume up or down.C
Mute.D
MEDIA
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
76
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Steering Wheel
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
•Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
•Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E173609
V
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type One
E173610
See Using Cruise Control (page 189).
Type Two
E173611
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 190).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E173617
See Information Displays (page 97).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and
off using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
77
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Steering Wheel
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
78
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your
feet are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 128).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
79
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E208496
•Rotate away from you for long wipe
interval.
•Rotate toward you for short wipe
interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
E256816
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
•Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
•Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
•Switch autowipers off.
80
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E208497
•A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
•A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
•A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Rear Window Wiper Blade
E208498
Intermittent wipe.2
Low speed wipe.1
Off.0
Rear Window Washer
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to switch on the rear
washer. The control returns to the 2 or 0
position when you release it.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.
81
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
•A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
•A water puddle inside the lamp.
•Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E156651
ABC
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
Headlamp High Beam
E167827
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
82
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Lighting
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high
beam off.
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
headlamps on in low visibility conditions,
for example daytime fog.
E158778
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
•During a single wipe.
•When you use the windshield washer.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
83
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Lighting
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
E163270
Adjust the brightness of the instrument
panel and all applicable lit components in
the vehicle during headlamp and parking
lamp operation.
•Tap the top or bottom of the control
to brighten or dim all interior lit
components incrementally.
•Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until you
reach the desired lighting level.
•Press and hold the top of the control
to the full on position to activate the
“dome on” feature. This turns on the
interior courtesy lights. The lights
remain on until you press the bottom
of the control.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
Set the delay time to keep the headlamps
on for up to three minutes after switching
off the ignition.
Follow the steps below to change the
delay time:
Note: Complete steps 1 through 6 within 10
seconds.
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control.
3. Switch the lighting control to the off
position.
4. Switch the ignition on.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control. The headlamps and
parking lamps turn on.
7. Switch the lighting control to the off
position when reaching the required
delay time. The headlamps and parking
lamps turn off.
Set the headlamp exit delay to one of the
following settings:
•Off.
•10 seconds.
•20 seconds.
•120 seconds.
Note: Adjust the time delay using the
display controls in the information display.
See Information Displays (page 97).
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to the off, autolamp or
parking lamp position.
84
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Lighting
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
E156823
Pull the lighting control toward you to
switch the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
off.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
•You open any door.
•You press a button on the remote
control
•You press the outer edge of the clear
lens on the front row map lamp.
Front Row Map Lamps
E166237
Second Row Reading Lamps
With Moonroof
E173272
85
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Lighting
Without Moonroof
E163274
Third Row Dome Lamps (If Equipped)
E163274
To switch on the lamps, press the outer
edge of the clear lens.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen. See your SYNC information.
86
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
When closing the power windows,
verify they are free of obstruction and
make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the control to open the window.
Press again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
you lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
87
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Windows and Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E163059
B
AC
Left-hand mirror.A
Off.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you
want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center
position to lock the mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
E163060
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
Pull the control back to fold the mirrors in
or out.
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
•The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
•The mirrors feel loose.
•The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
•One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time you manually
fold the mirrors.
88
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
121).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 128).
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the mirror are closer than
they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 196).
89
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
You can manually open or close the sliding
shade when the moonroof is closed. Pull
the shade toward the front of your vehicle
to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
90
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E163063
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function. While bounce-back
is active, the closing force increases for
each of the next three times that you close
the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT
control to close the moonroof.
91
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES Note: Cluster shown in standard measure
– metric clusters similar.
E212029
Tachometer.A
Information Display. See
General Information (page
97).
B
Speedometer.C
Fuel Gauge.D
92
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Instrument Cluster
E217329
Left information display. See
General Information (page
97).
A
Speedometer.B
Right information display. See
your SYNC information.
C
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 190).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
93
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Instrument Cluster
Airbag Readiness
E67017
If this light fails to illuminate
when you switch the ignition on,
continues to flash or remains on,
it indicates a malfunction. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer. A tone
sounds when there is a malfunction.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
Brake System
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It may take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
E144522
It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
Charging System
It illuminates when the battery
is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running , there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
See Using Cruise Control
(page 189).
Directional Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right or the hazard
warning flasher. If the indicators
stay on or flash faster, check for a burned
out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 261).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 250).
94
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. If the oil level is sufficient,
this indicates a system malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
See Engine Oil Check (page 249).
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp
E71880
It illuminates and a chime
sounds until you fasten the
seatbelts.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.
Head Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will
illuminate on the windshield in
certain instances when using
adaptive cruise control and/or the collision
warning system. It will also illuminate
momentarily when you start your vehicle
to make sure the display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Liftgate Ajar
Illuminates when you do not
completely close the liftgate.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel
level is low or the fuel tank is
nearly empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates if the tire pressure
in one or more tires is below the
correct tire pressure.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
95
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Instrument Cluster
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power
Illuminates when a powertrain
or an AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 160).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 179).
Stability Control Off
E130458
It illuminates when you switch
the system off.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
96
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1)
E214426
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
97
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
•Trip 1 & 2
•Fuel Economy
•Information
•Settings
Trip 1 & 2
Trip 1 & 2
Speedometer
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.
Speedometer
Shows vehicle speed digitally.
Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a
given trip.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Econ
Average Fuel
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
Average Fuel
This display shows the average fuel
consumption since the function was last
reset.
98
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Information
Information
Intelligent AWD
MyKey® Distance (if key is programmed) — Distance traveled when a programmed key
is in use.
MyKey® Information — Number of MyKeys and admin keys programmed)
Coolant Temp. — The engine coolant indicator will change colors indicating: blue for
cool, gray for normal and red for hot. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
Settings
Settings
Traction CtrlDriver Assist
Blindspot
High, Normal or
Low
SensitivityCollision Warn
Chimes
Warning
Cross Traffic
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Sway
Select your applicable languageLanguageDisplay
Miles & GAL, l/
100km or km/l
DistanceUnits
Fahrenheit (°F) or
Celsius (°C)
Temperature
Auto Engine OffConvenience
99
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Autolamp DelayAutolamp Delay
DisplayCompass
Calibrate
Set Zone
Normal or TowingDTE calculation
Easy Entry/Exit
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
All Doors or
Driver's First
Remote Unlock
Set to XXX%Oil Life Reset
Switch Enabled or Switch DisabledPower Liftgate
Auto or Last
Settings
Climate ControlRemote Start
Automatic or OffSeats and Wheel or
Seats
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System
Remote OpenWindows
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Traction Ctrl
Choose desired speed or OffMax Speed
Speed Minder
100
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Volume Limiter
Do Not Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Information Display Controls
(Type 2)
E217330
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back
to the main menu.
•Display Mode
•Trip 1 & 2
•Fuel Economy
•Driver Assist
•Settings
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.
101
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
XXX mi (km) to empty, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 1
Round tachometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 2
Round tachometer, Engine coolant temp gauge, Fuel gauge and Total
odometer
Option 3
Digital speedometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 4
Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ trans-
mission (SST), the cluster will change to the round tachometer if not already selected.
XXX mi (km) to empty
Shows approximate fuel level before the
fuel tank reaches empty. The value is
dynamic and can change (raise or lower)
depending on driving style.
Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
pump symbol shows the fuel filler door
side of your vehicle. When the fuel level
becomes low, the level indicator will
change to amber. When the fuel level
becomes critically low, the level indicator
will change to red.
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel
warnings will display earlier.
Round tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute. Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear will appear in the
display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Trip 1 & 2
Choose between the following trip
displays.
Trip 1 & 2
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
102
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.
Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a
given trip.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Economy
30 Min Fuel History
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
30 Min Fuel History
This display shows a bar chart of your fuel
history.
Driver Assist
Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warn
Cross Traffic
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
103
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
Sport, Normal or ComfortHandling in DDrive
Control
Vehicle
Sport or NormalHandling in S
Auto Engine Off
Normal or TowingDTE Calcula-
tion
Easy Entry / Exit
Select time intervalAutolamp DelayLighting
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
All doors or Driver doorRemote Unlocking
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Reset
Switch Enabled or Switch DisabledPower Lift-
gate
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote
Start Auto Heated or OffSeats and Wheel or
Seats
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System
Remote OpenWindows
Remote Close
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
MyKeys and Admin KeysMykey
Status
MyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate
MyKey
104
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Traction
Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Speed Minder
On or OffVolume
Limiter
Always On or User SelectableDo Not
Disturb
On or OffMyKey
Report
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear
MyKeys
Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge
Display
Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to SetLanguage
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temper-
ature
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear
if a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E173229
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
105
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from
engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 190).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function
properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 190).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 190).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the
driver.
AdvanceTrac Off On
Alarm
ActionMessage
The alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See
Anti-Theft Alarm (page 74).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
106
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
AWD
ActionMessage
Displays if the AWD system disables to protect itself. This
may occur if you operate the vehicle after installing the
compact spare tire, if the system is overheating or if there is
an issue with another vehicle system that prevents the AWD
system from operating. The AWD system resumes normal
operation and clears this message after you install the road
tire and you switch the ignition on and off, or after you allow
the system to cool. If this message remains on, have a quali-
fied technician service your vehicle to repair other vehicle
systems.
AWD OFF
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly and the
powertrain fault indicator is illuminated. See Warning Lamps
and Indicators (page 93). If the warning stays illuminated
or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Check AWD
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge
has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will
allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
107
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System
(page 196).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 196).
Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 196).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Brake System
ActionMessage
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be
inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 256).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive
your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
108
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Malfunction
The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor
radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front
of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the
engine is on.
Engine ON
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
109
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting
(page 147).
No Key Detected
The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and
an Intelligent Access key is not detected inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power is
Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is
programmed to the system.
Key Programmed x Keys
Total
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys
have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 249).
Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 249).Oil Change Required
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over
Temperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact
Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
110
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your
vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive
Safely
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
180).
Check Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
180).
Check Rear Park Aid
The park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
111
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Power Steering
Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 293).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 293).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. For more information on how the system operates
under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 293). If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
112
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 177).
Traction Control Off
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any
position other than P (Park).
Shift to Park
Towing
ActionMessage
The system detects trailer sway, so you need to reduce your
speed.
Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed
113
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E210700
Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
A
Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
B
A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
C
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may turn
on and off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.
114
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel
vents, air conditioning turns on
and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed.
E
Temperature control: Adjusts
the temperature of the air
circulated in your vehicle.
F
Rear fan speed control:
Adjusts the volume of air
circulated to the rear of the
passenger compartment.
G
Rear passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature to the rear of the
passenger compartment.
H
Rear climate control lock:
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.
I
Rear passenger power: Press
to switch the rear system on and
off.
J
Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
K
Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
121).
L
Defrost: Press to distribute air
through the windshield air vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to
the instrument panel and
footwell vents turns off. You can
also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.
M
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
E210701
115
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.
A
Power and fan speed control:
Press to switch the system on
and off. When the system is off,
it prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle. Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
B
DUAL: Press to switch on
temperature control for the
passenger side of the vehicle.
When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the
same as the driver settings.
C
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging or to
improve cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. The driver and
passenger settings set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning turns on and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
F
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.
AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust
G
to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature. You can also
switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.
Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
121).
H
Defrost: Press to distribute air
through the windshield air vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to
the instrument panel and
footwell vents turns off. You can
also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.
I
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
116
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
E210702
Defrost: Press to distribute air
through the windshield air vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to
the instrument panel and
footwell vents turns off. You can
also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.
A
Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
121).
B
AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust
C
to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature. You can also
switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.
Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
D
A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
E
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.
MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. The driver and
passenger settings set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning turns on and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed.
F
117
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
G
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging or to
improve cooling efficiency.
Passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting on the
passenger side.
H
Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
I
Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.
J
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.
118
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
Quickly Heating the Interior
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
2
Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
3
Recommended Settings for Heating
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
3
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Select MAX A/C.Select MAX A/C.1
Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
2
119
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.
3
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press the defrost button.Direct air to the windshield using the air
distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press A/C.2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
4
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
120
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
E210706
Rear fan speed control:
Adjusts the volume of air
circulated to the rear passenger
compartment.
A
Rear air distribution control:
Press to switch the direction of
airflow.
B
Rear passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting for the rear
passenger compartment.
C
Rear heated seats: Press to
switch the rear heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats
(page 136).
D
Fan speed control lock: When
illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.
E
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
Heated Rear Window
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear
window turns off after a short period of
time. Press the button again to switch it
off.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
121
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
•It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
•It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
•It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 447).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.
Some features may remain on if they turn
on during remote start:
•Driver heated seat.
•Driver cooled seat.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated mirrors.
•Heated rear window.
Note: If the passenger heated or cooled
seats are on when you switch the vehicle
off, they default to the driver setting when
you switch the vehicle on.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 97).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and you select AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on pre-selected
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats and heated
steering wheel are set to high (if available,
and you select AUTO in the information
display). The rear defroster and heated
mirrors turn on.
122
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
•Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
•Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
123
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Head Restraints
E138642
Second Row Center Seat Head
Restraint (If Equipped)
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
1. Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second Row Outermost Seat Head
Restraints
E162872
A
C
B
124
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
buttons.
C
The outermost head restraints are
non-adjustable, but they can be removed.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
1. Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third Row Head Restraints (If
Equipped)
E190836
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Fold strap.C
Folding the Head Restraint
Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head
restraint back up to reset.
Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
power folding seats to fold the head
restraint.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
E144727
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort.
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
125
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing loss of control of
your vehicle.
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
E190838
Recline Adjustment
WARNING
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
E190837
Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)
E209846
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while your vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
126
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
E138647
127
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E138648
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the memory seat,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
•Driver seat.
•Power mirrors.
•Optional power steering column.
•Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
The memory control is on the driver door.
2
1
E205043
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
You can recall a programmed memory
position:
•Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if the
ignition is on.
•In any gearshift position if the ignition
is not on.
You can also recall a programmed memory
position by:
•Pressing your remote control
transmitter unlock button (if the
remote control is programmed to a
memory position).
•Unlocking your vehicle with an
intelligent access key (if it is
programmed to a memory position).
Note: Using a linked keyfob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
128
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
Note: Adjusting any active memory feature
or pressing a memory switch during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
features to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit
and entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2 in
(5 cm) rearward when the transmission is
in park (P) and you remove the key from
the ignition or you switch the ignition off.
The driver seat and steering wheel return
to their previous positions when you put
the key in the ignition or switch the ignition
on.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 97).
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
Second Row Seats
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat's
seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
Recline Adjustment
E209847
Note: For the bench seat only, make sure
the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Lift the handle to adjust the seatback
rearward or forward. You can also fold the
seatback forward until it is flat.
129
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward (If equipped)
E190838
Power Fold and Tumble Seat
WARNING
Do not fold a seat if it is occupied.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
This feature is available for the right-hand
seat on seven-passenger vehicles and on
both sides for six-passenger vehicles.
E190848
The control is at the back of the rear door
opening. Press it to fold the seatback down
and tumble the seat forward for access to
the third row.
Note: When you switch the ignition off, the
power fold feature works until the battery
saver turns it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Doors and Locks
(page 63). Keep the key in the accessory or
run position to prevent the feature from
timing out.
Third Row Seats (Accessing the Seat)
WARNINGS
Check under the seat cushion to
make sure no cargo or objects are
under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
Do not adjust a seat or release a seat
floor latch when the vehicle is
moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in a sudden stop or crash.
Do not drive your vehicle with a seat
that is unlatched or in the folded
position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
Note: Remove items from the second-row
seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before
tumbling them.
Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front-row
seat forward to allow the second-row seat
to be fully tumbled.
130
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
Fold and tumble the second-row seat to
access the third row.
E209848
1. Lift the handle on the side of the seat.
The seatback folds flat.
E190844
2. Lift the handle all the way up until the
seat releases from the floor. Rotate the
seat forward to allow access to the
third row. Note: The seatback must be
folded flat in order to release the floor
latches. Make sure that there are no
objects on the seat cushion that may
restrict the seatback from folding flat.
E190845
3. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E209849
4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
Note: The seatback will not raise if the rear
latch hooks are not properly engaged to the
floor striker. If the seatback does not raise,
then repeat Step 4.
131
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
Third Row Seat Exit
E209850
1. Pull on the strap on the back of the
second row seat. This folds the
seatback forward. Pull the strap a
second time to tumble the seat
forward, allowing easy exit from the
third row seat. Note: You must fold the
seatback flat in order to release the
floor latches. Make sure that there are
no objects on the seat cushion that
may restrict the seatback from folding
flat.
E190850
2. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E209849
3. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then
repeat steps 3 and 4.
E190847
4. Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.
132
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
Stowing the Third Row Seat
Note: Remove all objects from the seat and
stowage tub. Objects in the seat or stowage
tub may cause serious damage to the seat
upholstery and cause improper seat
function.
E210069
1. From the rear of the vehicle, stow the
head restraints by pulling the strap on
the middle of the seatback just below
the head restraint. Then, fold the
seatback by pulling and holding the red
strap while pushing the seatback
forward. Release the strap once the
seatback starts rotating forward.
E209852
2. Release the cushion latches by pulling
the short black strap while pulling on
the strap at the top of the seatback.
This tumbles the seat all the way into
the floor tub.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.
E209853
Note: Do not use the third row seat back as
a load floor when the seatback is folded.
Sharp objects may result in damage to seat
upholstery.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it.
Unstowing the Third Row Seat
WARNING
Make sure the seat fully locks into
place by rocking it backward and
forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in a
crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or brief cases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: Make sure the area under the forward
portion of the load floor is free of objects
before unstowing the third row seat.
133
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
E209854
1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of the floor
tub by squeezing and pulling up on the
handle. Once the seat is at a vertical
position, push the seat over, letting it
fall onto the latches.
E209852
2. To return the seatback to the upright
position, pull the red strap. Then, while
holding the red strap, pull the long
strap on the seatback to raise the
seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to their
normal positions.
PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If
equipped)
The third row seat features a power
one-touch operation that allows you to
adjust the left, right, or both seats into a
NORMAL, STOW, FOLD, or TAILGATE
position with just one touch of a button.
Note: The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
tailgate is open. If the ignition is off and the
feature is still running, the battery saver
turns it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Keyless Entry
(page 66). Keep the key in the accessory or
run position to prevent the feature from
timing out.
The third row power seat buttons are
behind the third row seats on the left-hand
quarter trim panel.
134
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
E209855
Press to return the seat to the
normal seating position.
A
Press to stow the seat into the
tub floor.
B
Press the top of the button to
fold down the seatback. Press
the bottom portion of the button
to put the seat into the tailgate
position.
C
Press to select either right-hand
seat, the left-hand seat or both.
D
Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
the obstacle can be removed.
Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
Note: In the unlikely event that the third
row power seat stops prematurely or travels
to an unexpected position, press the FOLD
button (C) to reset the seat and return it to
a normal position.
WARNING
Do not sit in seats that are rearward
facing when your vehicle is moving.
This is not a correct seating position
and the seatbelts do not properly function
this way. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.
135
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
E245760
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Second Row Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
136
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature will
turn itself off. You will need to reactivate
it.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not required.
137
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
138
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away
from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further
action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
139
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release,every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter
until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
140
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.
141
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
142
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
•Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
•Inside the center console.
•On the rear of the center console.
•In the cargo area.
•On the passenger side floor panel.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
E194174
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
143
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
•On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
•Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
•Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
•Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
•Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
•Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
144
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E210728
Front storage compartment.A
Cup holder.B
Center storage compartment
with auxiliary power point and
USB ports.
C
Auxiliary power point or cigar
lighter.
D
Rear storage compartment.E
Auxiliary power point.F
Rear climate controls.G
Second Row Center Console (If
Equipped)
E211667
Cup holder.A
Armrest.B
Utility compartment and
refrigerator unit.
C
Console Refrigerator and Freezer
(If Equipped)
This feature operates when the vehicle is
on or in accessory mode. Limit the time of
use when the vehicle is in accessory mode
to avoid the vehicle battery running out of
charge. You should only use this feature
when the vehicle is running.
E211653
145
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Storage Compartments
Flip the console lid forward, then lift off the
cover to open the cooling compartment.
Make sure to replace the cover after using
it. This helps maintain a more consistent
cooling temperature.
E211668
Refrigerator: Briefly press and hold
COOL. The indicator light on the cool side
of the switch illuminates and the indicator
light on the freeze side glows when the
refrigerator is active. The temperature
cools to approximately 41°F (5°C). Briefly
press and hold COOL again to switch off
the refrigerator. Briefly press and hold
FREEZE to change to freezer mode.
Freezer: Briefly press and hold FREEZE.
Both indicator lights illuminate when the
freezer is active. The temperature cools to
approximately 23°F (-5°C). Press FREEZE
again to switch off the freezer. Press COOL
to change to refrigerator mode.
This feature turns off when you switch the
vehicle off. It turns back on to the last
mode when you restart the vehicle.
Cleaning and Maintenance
Note: Condensation on the inside walls of
the refrigerator is normal under certain
conditions.
This feature is maintenance free, but you
can clean the inside of the unit and the
cover with a mild soap and water solution.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
146
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)
E252522
A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D (start) - Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
147
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
•Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
•Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
148
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
•The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
149
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before your vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
•You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
•You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 97). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
•During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
150
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
•Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
151
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
•Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
152
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Fuels can cause serious injury or
death if misused or mishandled.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is
a cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
•Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
•Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
153
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 210).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
•Diesel fuel.
•Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
•Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
•Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
•You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
154
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
•Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
•Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
•Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 154).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
155
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
E206911
A B
C D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
D
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
156
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not pry open the fuel tank filler
valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Wait at least five seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
A
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
157
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206912
A B
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message may appear in the
information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
154). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
If this action corrects the problem the
message may not immediately reset. If the
message remains and a warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 97).
158
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuel and Refueling
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
•Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
•Fully loading your vehicle.
•Carrying unnecessary weight.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
•Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 153).
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
•Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
•You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
159
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING
Do not remove or alter the original
equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal
floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
•Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
•Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
•The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
•Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
•Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
•A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
•A plugged engine air filter element.
•Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
•A clogged fuel filter.
•Contaminated fuel.
•Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
•An open or pinched sensor hose.
•Incorrect engine oil level.
160
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Engine Emission Control
•Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
•Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
•Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
•Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
•Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 223).
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
161
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 156).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
162
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
163
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than a few seconds will limit
engine performance, which may result in
difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and
could lead to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
P
R
N
D
S
E142628
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
•Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This increases
engine RPM during engine braking.
•Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
•Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
164
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Transmission
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
If equipped with the toggle on the
gearshift lever:
•Press the (+) button to upshift.
•Press the (-) button to downshift.
E142629
If equipped with steering wheel
paddles:
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by moving the gearshift lever to the sport
(S) position.
•Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
•Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
The system determines when temporary
manual control is no longer in use and
returns to automatic control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster displays your
currently selected gear.
Note: The system stays in manual control
until you make another shift selection (for
example, drive [D]).
165
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Transmission
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the stoplamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 234).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition off and remove the key.
E211089
2. Remove the cup holder insert.
3. Using a screwdriver (or similar tool),
release the tab to the access door and
remove.
4. Locate the brake shift interlock lever
on the passenger side of the shifter
assembly.
5. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press
down and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift lever
out of park (P) and into neutral (N).
6. Install the access door and cup holder
insert.
7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle,
and release the parking brake.
166
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
167
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to
power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input
from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities
in which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is
present, the warning Check AWD displays
in the information display. The AWD system
is not functioning correctly and defaults to
front-wheel drive. When this warning
displays, have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to
front-wheel drive. This may occur if the
vehicle is operated in extreme conditions
with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
sand. To resume normal AWD function as
soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10
minutes. After the engine has been
restarted and the AWD system has
adequately cooled, the AWD OFF message
will turn off and normal AWD function
returns. If the engine is not stopped, the
AWD OFF message turns off when the
system cools and normal AWD function
returns.
All-Wheel Drive Messages
Action / DescriptionAWD Messages
Displays if the AWD system disables to
protect itself. This may occur if you operate
the vehicle after installing the compact
spare tire, if the system is overheating or if
there is an issue with another vehicle
system that prevents the AWD system from
AWD OFF
operating. The AWD system resumes
168
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Action / DescriptionAWD Messages
normal operation and clears this message
after you install the road tire and you switch
the ignition on and off, or after you allow
the system to cool. If this message remains
on, have a qualified technician service your
vehicle to repair other vehicle systems.
Displayed in conjunction with the power-
train malfunction/reduced power light
when the system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Check AWD
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Spare Tires
A spare tire of a different size other than
the tire provided should never be used. The
AWD system may disable automatically
and enter front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components if a non-full
sized tire is installed. This condition may
display an AWD OFF message in the
information display. If there is an AWD OFF
message in the information display from
using a non-full sized spare tire, this
indicator should turn off after reinstalling
the repaired or replaced normal road tire
and cycling the ignition off and on. It is
recommended to reinstall the repaired or
replaced road tire as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system.
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Mismatched Tires
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver's door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
169
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The use of non-recommended tires
and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you have
questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system. However, the AWD
system is capable of tolerating any
combination of new and worn tires of the
same original tire size. For example, using
3 worn tread tires and 1 new tread tire all
of the same original tire size, can be
tolerated by the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
170
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
•In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (that is, turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and
as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
•If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from
concrete to gravel) there will be a
change in the way the vehicle responds
to a maneuver (steering, acceleration
or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.
Sand
Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip
through Brake, Engine, and AWD
calibrations. However, during low speed
driving, disabling traction control in deep
sand can help keep the wheels moving to
maintain vehicle momentum.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This could
cause the AWD system to overheat and
default to front-wheel drive. If this occurs,
an AWD OFF message displays in the
information display. To resume normal
AWD function as soon as possible, stop
the vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the AWD
171
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
system has adequately cooled, the AWD
OFF message turns off and normal AWD
function returns. In the event the engine is
not stopped, the AWD OFF message turns
off when the system cools and normal
AWD function returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L
(Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear
operation will maximize the engine and
transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, have the power transfer unit (PTU)
or rear axle serviced by an authorized
dealer.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
172
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 176).
173
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.
174
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 273).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 93).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
E144522
It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
175
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
•You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
•Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
•You take corners too fast.
•The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
176
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
•Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
•Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
•Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
177
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
•The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
•The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
•The stability and traction control light
flashes.
•Your vehicle slows down.
•Reduced engine power.
•A vibration in the brake pedal.
•The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
•If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
178
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 177).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 177).
179
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
The system may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb reflection.
Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
Traffic control systems, inclement
weather, air brakes, external motors
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The system may not detect small or
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See
Principle of Operation (page 57).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
connected to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 97).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 105).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
180
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
•Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause interference.
Active park assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
Note: The blind spot information system
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during an active park assist
maneuver.
Note: Active park assist is a multi-step
process and may require you to shift your
transmission multiple times. Follow the
on-screen instructions until you complete
the parking process.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
your vehicle (hands-free) while you control
the accelerator, transmission and brakes.
The system visually and audibly guides you
to park your vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel or pushing the active park
assist button.
181
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
The system may not operate correctly in
any of the following conditions:
•You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
•One or more tires are improperly
inflated.
•You try to park on a tight curve.
•Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
•The edge of the neighboring parking
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
•The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow or
fog.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
fascia, free from now, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the systems accuracy. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference. For
example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air
brakes or horns.
Note: Following a change in tire size, the
system must recalibrate and operation may
be impaired for a short time.
Do not use the system if:
•You have attached a bike rack, trailer
or other object near the sensors on the
front or rear of your vehicle.
•You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
•A foreign object damages or obstructs
the sensors.
•The correct tire size is not in use. For
example, when using a mini-spare tire.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button to turn the
system on or off.
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left hand side or
right hand side of your vehicle. If the
direction indicator is not used, the system
defaults to the passenger side of your
vehicle.
E130107
182
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
When the system finds a suitable space it
displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the display screen. If your
vehicle is moving very slowly, you may
need to pull forward a short distance
before the system is ready to park.
Note: You can also activate the system
after you drive partially or completely pass
the parking space. To do so, press the active
park assist button and the system informs
you if you recently passed a suitable parking
space.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last detected space.
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the display screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted, for
example driver input is detected, the system
switches off and you need to take full
control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the
steering wheel and nothing obstructing its
movement, your vehicle steers itself into
the space. The system displays instructions
to move your vehicle back and forth in the
space.
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid
(accompanied by a touchscreen display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a chime
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
183
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
•Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
•Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
•Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
•Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
•Switching off the traction control
system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
•Traction control has activated.
•There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered. For example, with snow, ice or dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
You may have recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect,
the vehicle must be driven on a straight road for a short period of time.
184
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission. For example, rolling
forward when the transmission is in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size or of a different size.
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly. For example, when driving from
a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Use caution when the rear cargo door
is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar,
the camera will be out of position
and the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
door is ajar. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNINGS
Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure
to follow this instruction could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
Do not switch the camera features
on or off when your vehicle is moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle. During operation, lines appear in
the display which represent your vehicle’s
path and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
185
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
•Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
the intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
•Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
•Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides
during normal operation and some objects
may not be seen. In some vehicles, the
guidelines disappear when you connect the
trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
•Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
•The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Active Guidelines (If Equipped)
Note: Active guidelines are only shown with
fixed guidelines while your vehicle is in
reverse (R).
186
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelineA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Fixed Guidelines
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
fixed guidelines are on.
E163914
A
E
D
C
B
Rear bumperA
Fixed guideline: Red ZoneB
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneC
Fixed guideline: Green zoneD
CenterlineE
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
187
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Manual zoom allows you to get a closer
view of an object behind your vehicle. The
zoomed image keeps the bumper in the
image to provide a reference. The zoom
feature is only active while the
transmission is in reverse (R).
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See Settings (page 415).
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot (If
Equipped)
The system provides an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones in the display
screen. The zones highlight green, yellow
and red when the parking aid sensors
detect an object in the coverage area.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
•Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
•You shift your vehicle into park (P).
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
188
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving
uphill.
E173610
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
information display.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
•Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
189
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with aftermarket trailer
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
Adaptive cruise control may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
E173611
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press ON.
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
190
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Cruise Control
E164805
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E164805
5. A vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
•The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
•The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
•Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
•You set a new gap distance.
191
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Cruise Control
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
E173611
E164805
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic behaviorGraphic display,
bars indicated
between vehicles
Sport.1
Normal.2
Normal.3
Comfort.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
192
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
•Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET- to
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when
you reach the desired speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press RES. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Automatic Cancellation
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
Automatic braking releases.
The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h).
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
•The tires lose traction.
•The engine speed is too low.
•You apply the parking brake.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
Detection Issues
WARNINGS
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
If the system malfunctions, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
193
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Cruise Control
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
System Not Available
The system may not turn on if there is:
•A blocked sensor.
•High brake temperature.
•A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E145632
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.
194
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Cruise Control
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
195
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Cruise Control
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
Never use the Blind Spot
Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
196
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
System Sensor Blockage
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
in heavy rain can cause system
degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
cause system degradation. This is referred
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the system alert
indicators will remain ON and the system
will no longer provide any vehicle warnings.
You can clear the information display
warning but the alert indicators will remain
illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
•After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
•By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 105).
System Limitations
The system does have its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
may limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the system:
•Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
•Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
•When several vehicles forming a
convoy pass through the blind zone.
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page
97). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display shows
a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system switches back on every
time you start your vehicle.
197
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Never use the Cross Traffic Alert
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before backing
out of a parking space. Cross Traffic Alert
is not a replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
198
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works
with the reverse sensing system that
sounds its own series of tones. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 180).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
199
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
Information System (page 196). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
The system detects approaching vehicles
from up to 45 ft (14 m) away, though
coverage decreases when the sensors are
blocked. Reversing slowly helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
•Stationary or slow moving vehicles.
•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
•Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.
•Severe weather conditions.
•Debris build-up near or around the
sensor(s).
•Small distance to the vehicle ahead.
•Adjacently parking vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
•Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
•Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
•Backing out of an angled parking spot.
If the rear end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
False Alerts
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will
appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
the system can only be switched back on
at an authorized dealer.
200
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•Correct tire pressures.
•Uneven tire wear.
•Loose or worn suspension
components.
•Loose or worn steering components.
•Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s
attention, and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure
to press the brake pedal to activate the
brakes may result in a collision.
201
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks. A radar detects if
your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and
an audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light
illuminates, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking. This
may be apparent to the driver. The system
does not automatically activate the brakes
but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full force
braking is applied even if the brake pedal
is lightly pressed.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 97).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though
the manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings. See General
Information (page 97).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
202
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the
radar signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering
with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
•Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
•Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
•Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
•Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
•Small distance to vehicle ahead.
•Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
203
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Aids
CARGO NETS
WARNING
This net is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.
E210596
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
provided anchors. Do not put more than
50 lb (22 kg) in the net.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the roof rack, is 100 lb
(45 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
You must place loads directly on the
crossbars fitted to the roof rack side rails.
When using the roof rack system, we
recommend that you use genuine Ford
accessory crossbars specifically designed
for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
204
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Load Carrying
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
E143816
PAYLOAD
205
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
206
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Load Carrying
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the performance
and handling of your vehicle,
cause vehicle damage and can
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
207
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Load Carrying
WARNINGS
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating can adversely affect
the performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
208
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Load Carrying
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
When loading the roof racks,
we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as
maintain a low center of gravity.
Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Take extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.
209
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have
electrical items, such as fuses or
relays, related to towing. See
Fuses (page 234).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
•Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in the Load Carrying
chapter. See Load Limit (page
204).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
210
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
204).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) if
your vehicle can tow a class I
trailer, or 40 ft² (3.72 m²) if your
vehicle can tow a class III trailer.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Check
state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to
this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
211
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Maximum trailer
weight
Maximum GCWRPowertrain and
trailer class
2,000 lb (907 kg)6,900 lb (3,131 kg)3.5L TiVCT front-
wheel drive, Class I
2,000 lb (907 kg)7,050 lb (3,199 kg)3.5L TiVCT all-wheel
drive, Class I
2,000 lb (907 kg)7,070 lb (3,208 kg)3.5L GTDi all-wheel
drive, Class I
4,500 lb (2,042 kg) *
9,355 lb (4,244 kg)3.5L TiVCT front-
wheel drive, Class III
4,500 lb (2,042 kg) **
9,520 lb (4,319 kg)3.5L TiVCT all-wheel
drive, Class III
4,500 lb (2,042 kg) **
9,620 lb (4,364 kg)3.5L GTDi all-wheel
drive, Class III
* For towing trailers up to 3500 lb (1588 kg), use a weight-carrying hitch
and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your
vehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers over 3500 lb (1588
kg), up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), we recommend you use a
weight-distributing hitch to increase front axle load while towing.
**For towing trailers up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), use a weight-carrying hitch
and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your
vehicle's underbody structure.
212
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 447).
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 204).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
(Vehicles with a Trailer Towing
Package and 7–Pin Connector)
E211391
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
213
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING
Do not adjust the spring bars so that
your vehicle's rear bumper is higher
than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park your vehicle, without the trailer,
on a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight distributing bars so that the
height of the front fender is
approximately halfway between H1 and
H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not
level, adjust the ball height accordingly
and repeat Steps 3–6.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
Trailer Brake Controller Connector
(If Equipped)
The connector is located under the
instrument panel above the brake pedal.
214
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
E211392
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
•When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
•Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
215
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the
components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which
is not a normal maintenance inspection
item unless there is a possibility of a leak
or other axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies or vehicle
transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following
conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
•Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot
shift into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
164).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 114).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
You can tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
•Tow only in the forward direction.
•Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless
start button until the vehicle starts.
216
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
gearshift into neutral (N).
3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door
key to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 257).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then turning the ignition key
until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).
3. Turn off your vehicle by turning the
ignition key past the accessory position.
The key position is between the
accessory and off positions. See
Ignition Switch (page 147).
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 257).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
All Vehicles
•Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
•Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each
day and every six hours thereafter. With
the engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground (by using
a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This causes damage to your
all-wheel drive system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider.
217
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
•Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
•Revving the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
•Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
•To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
218
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Hints
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
E266447
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
•Check that the horn works.
•Check that the exterior lights work.
•Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Secure the floor mat to both
retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
219
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Hints
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
220
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
•24 hours a day, seven days a week.
•For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
•A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
•Battery jump start.
•Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
•Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
•Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
•Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
•Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
221
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
•Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
•Press the button again to switch them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the fuel system checked.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
222
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Roadside Emergencies
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
223
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Roadside Emergencies
WARNINGS
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
224
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
•You press the hazard control button.
•You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
•Your vehicle runs out of power.
•Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
225
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
226
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
•Owner Manuals.
•Maintenance Schedules.
•Recalls.
•Ford Extended Service Plans.
•Ford Genuine Accessories.
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
227
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number.
•Your telephone number (home and
business).
•The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
228
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
229
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
230
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
expcac@ford.com-+1 313 594 4857
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
prcac@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/A+1-313-594-4857Sub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
231
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
232
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
233
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect the vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 257).
E173618
97
98
77
96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88
66
44
78
56
39
26
18 1617
3 12456789
192021222324
2728293031
40414243
55
575859606162636465
798081828384858687
67
45
32
10111213
333435
464748495051
6869707172
74
73
76
75
53
37 36
54
38
25
15
14
52
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Fan relay 2.
40A1
1
Fan relay 1.
40A1
2
Trailer brake control module.
30A1
3
Wipers.
30A1
4
Washer pump.
234
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Anti-lock brake system pump.
50A1
5
Center console power point (without rear
park aid).
20A1
6
Power liftgate.
30A1
7
Moonroof.
20A1
8
Second row console power point.
20A1
9
Third row power seats relay.Relay10
Heated rear window relay.Relay11
Trailer tow battery charge relay.Relay12
Starter motor relay.Relay13
Cooling fan number 2 relay.Relay14
Fuel pump relay.Relay15
Not used.-16
110V AC power point.
30A1
17
Front blower motor relay.
40A1
18
Starter relay.
30A1
19
Storage bin power point.
20A1
20
Instrument panel power point / cigar
lighter.
20A1
21
Third row seat module.
30A1
22
Driver power seat.
30A1
23
Memory module.
Trailer tow battery charge.
30A1
24
Not used.-25
235
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Rear window defroster.
40A1
26
Heated mirrors.
Cargo power point.
20A1
27
Front heated and cooled seats.
30A1
28
Front heated seats (without cooled seats).
20A1
29
Rear heated seats.
20A1
30
Electric fan relay 3.
25A1
31
Auxiliary blower motor relay.Relay32
Cooling fan #1 relay.Relay33
Front blower motor relay.Relay34
Cooling fan (series) relay.Relay35
Not used.-36
Trailer tow right-hand stop/turn lamps
relay.
Relay37
Trailer tow reverse lamps relay.Relay38
Auxiliary blower motor.
30A1
39
Not used.-40
Not used.-41
Passenger power seat.
30A1
42
Anti-lock brake system valves.
20A1
43
Windshield washer relay.Relay44
Rain sensor.
5A2
45
Canister vent solenoid (EcoBoost engines).
5A2
46
Washer pump.
15A2
47
236
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Front park lamps.
10A2
48
Not used.-49
Heated mirrors.
10A2
50
Not used.-51
Not used.-52
Trailer tow left-hand stop/turn lamps relay.Relay53
Not used.-54
Wiper relay.Relay55
Fuel injectors.
30A2
56
Fuel pump relay.
Left-hand high intensity discharge head-
lamp.
20A2
57
Alternator sensor.
10A2
58
Brake on/off switch.
10A2
59
Trailer tow back-up lamps.
10A2
60
Not used.-61
A/C clutch relay.
10A2
62
Trailer tow stop/turn lamps.
15A2
63
Rear wipers.
15A2
64
Not used.-65
Powertrain control module – vehicle power
relay.
Relay66
Vehicle power #2 – oxygen sensor heater.
20A2
67
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.
237
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Vehicle power #4 (ignition coils).
20A2
68
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control
module).
20A2
69
Vehicle power #3 (coil) – A/C clutch relay.
15A2
70
Fan control relay coils 1-3.
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.
Not used.-71
Not used.-72
Not used.-73
Not used.-74
Not used.-75
Not used.-76
Trailer tow park lamps relay.Relay77
Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.
20A2
78
Not used.-79
Not used.-80
Not used.-81
Rear washer.
15A2
82
Not used.-83
Trailer tow park lamps.
20A2
84
Not used.-85
Powertrain control module.
5A2
86
Keep alive power and relay.
Powertrain control module relay.
238
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Canister vent solenoid (non-EcoBoost
engines).
Run/start relay.
5A2
87
Run/start relay.Relay88
Anti–lock brake system module.
10A2
89
Powertrain control module run/start.
10A2
90
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A2
91
Front blower relay coil.
5A2
92
Power steering module.
Auxiliary blower motor.
5A2
93
Rear window defroster relay power.
Battery charge relay.
Body control module run/start.
30A1
94
Front passenger window switch.
5A2
95
Not used.-96
Not used.-97
A/C clutch relay.Relay98
1 J Case Low Profile fuse.
2 Mini fuse.
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel. You
may need to remove a trim panel to access
it.
239
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
E163102
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Driver front power window.30A1
Memory seat.15A2
Second row seats.
Passenger side front window.30A3
Demand lamps battery saver relay.10A4
Audio amplifier20A5
Active noise control module.
Not used (spare).5A6
Driver seat module logic.7.5A7
Left front door zone module.
Keypad.
Power liftgate.10A8
240
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
SYNC module.10A9
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Front wiper motor relay.
Intelligent access module logic.10A11
Heads-up display.
Puddle lamp.15A12
Backlighting LED.
Interior lighting.
Right-hand direction indicators.15A13
Left-hand direction indicators.15A14
Center high mounted stop lamp.15A15
Backup lamp.
Right low beam headlamp.10A16
Left low beam headlamp.10A17
Third row power seats.10A18
Start button.
Keypad illumination.
Brake-shift interlock.
Powertrain control module wake-up.
Anti-theft system.
Not used (spare).20A19
Locks.20A20
Extended power module.10A21
Horn relay.20A22
Steering wheel control module logic.15A23
Instrument cluster.
Steering wheel control module.15A24
Datalink.
Liftgate release.15A25
Ignition switch.5A26
241
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Push button ignition switch.
Intelligent access module power.20A27
Not used (spare).15A28
Radio.20A29
Global positioning system module.
Front park lamps.15A30
Trailer tow relay for park lamps.
Front side markers.
Trailer tow brake controller.5A31
Smart window motors.15A32
Master window and mirror switch.
Lock switch illumination.
Moonroof.
110V AC power point.
Interior rearview mirror.
Not used (spare).10A33
Reverse park aid module.10A34
Rear heated seat module.
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Interior mirror.
Climate control humidity sensor.5A35
Heads-up display.
Heated steering wheel.10A36
Refrigerator.10A37
Front passenger window switch.10A38
High beams.15A39
Rear park lamps.10A40
License plate lamps.
Extended power module.7.5A41
Not used (spare).5A42
Not used (spare).10A43
242
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Not used (spare).10A44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control module.10A46
Fog lamp relay power.15A47
Front direction indicators.
Front passenger power window.30A Circuit breaker48
Rear power windows.
Delayed accessory relay.Relay49
Body control module.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
243
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
244
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E253246
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
245
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
2
E203009
3
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.
E202009
4
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC
246
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
E253238
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
250).
A
Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 257).
B
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 256).
C
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 257).
D
Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 234).
E
Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 267).
F
Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check
(page 254).
G
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 249).
H
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 249).
I
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
247
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
E173375
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
250).
A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 249).
B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 249).
C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 256).
D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 257).
E.
Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 234).
F.
Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 267).
G.
Automatic transmission dipstick.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid Check (page 254).
H.
Washer fluid reservoir. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 257).
I.
248
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 245).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 246).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See Under
Hood Overview (page 246).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 308).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
249
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 246).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.
250
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not put coolant in the windshield
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the
windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 447).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 302).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to Ford
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
251
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
302).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
•Alcohol.
•Methanol.
•Brine.
•Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
•Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
252
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
•Engine power is limited.
•The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
253
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the coolant temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives because they are
unnecessary and could lead to
transmission damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If
you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact
an authorized dealer.
254
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level
WARNING
The dipstick and surrounding
components are hot. Use gloves
when moving components and
checking the transmission fluid level.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
Only check the transmission fluid level
when the engine is at normal operating
temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temperature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
E190273
AB
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction. See Under Hood Overview
(page 247).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the cap and dipstick and remove it
again to check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add
fluid immediately. See Adding
Transmission Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum
range (below point A) add the correct
specification fluid to be within the hash
mark area. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308).
Note: If the fluid level is below the
minimum range do not drive your vehicle. A
low fluid level can damage the transmission.
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark
area (between points A and B) do not add
any fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum
range (above point B) fluid may need to
be removed. High fluid levels may be
caused by a overheating condition. If you
have operated your vehicle at high speeds,
towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot
weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a
minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking
the level.
Note: An overfill condition can damage the
transmission.
Adding Transmission Fluid*
1. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction.
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
255
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308). Pour the
fluid directly into the automatic
transmission fluid cap and dipstick
hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and
remove it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
*Vehicles With Turbocharged Engines
WARNING
Do not start the engine with the air
filter removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty and can result in serious injury.
1. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
2. Remove the air filter assembly securing
bolts.
3. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
4. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly
in a counterclockwise direction.
5. Check the transmission fluid level.
6. Install the air filter assembly in reverse
order. Tighten the air filter assembly
securing bolts until you feel a strong
resistance.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
256
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
257
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.
Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover
or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the
battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to the
vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory by
power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Fully press the brake pedal and start
the vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 317). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 87).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 317).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, press
the accelerator pedal to start the
engine.
258
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
7. While the engine is running, press the
brake pedal and shift into neutral (N).
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)
to completely relearn the idle and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
Front Wiper Blades
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
A
E165794
2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and
separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you turn the ignition on.
259
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
Rear Window Wiper Blade
E253247
1. Grab the wiper arm with one hand
close to the arm/blade joint and pull it
as far away from the glass as possible.
Do not use excessive force because it
can break the wiper arm at the heel.
Hold it there until the next step.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Grab the primary structure of the blade
with the other hand close to the
arm/blade joint.
E253248
3. The wiper arm has a snap retention
feature to receive a cross pin from the
wiper blade structure. Grip tightly and
press on the arm/blade joint from
beneath and separate the blade from
the arm. Avoid rotating the wiper blade
structure and trapping your left hand
between the arm and blade.
4. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm
and press it into place.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim
Headlamp Aim Target
E142592
8 ft (2.4 m).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 ft (7.6 m).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away from
a vertical wall or screen.
2. Apply the parking brake.
260
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
3. Measure the height from the center of
the headlamp to the ground.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center of the
headlamp bulb.
4. Mark a horizontal reference line on the
vertical wall or screen that is a
minimum of 8 ft (2.4 m) long.
5. Switch the low beam headlamps on
and open the hood.
E142465
6. There is a distinct change from light to
dark in the right-hand portion of the
headlamp beam pattern. Position the
top edge of this cut-off at the
horizontal reference line.
E220457
7. To adjust the vertical aim, use a
suitable tool to rotate the adjuster
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern while
adjusting one headlamp, block the light
from the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and switch the low
beam headlamps off.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not adjustable on your
vehicle.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp
assembly, you must first remove the front
fascia and front bumper assemblies. We
recommend you see an authorized dealer.
E220458
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to do so could result in
serious personal injury.
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal
injury.
261
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 265).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
Headlamp
E220459
A B
C
Headlamp low beam. Headlamp
high beam.
A
Front direction indicator. Front
parking lamp.
B
Front direction indicator.Front
parking lamp.
C
Front Direction Indicator and Front
Parking Lamp
E220501
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Headlamp Low Beam and
Headlamp High Beam
Note: If your vehicle has high-intensity
discharge headlamps, these lamps operate
at a high voltage. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
262
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
3
E220460
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)
E220461
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Use suitable tools, for example a
screwdriver and a socket wrench, to
remove the wheel arch liner fixings.
Carefully reposition the wheel arch liner
to access to the front fog lamp bulb
and electrical connector.
Note: To remove the lower push pin, use a
flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center
release pin.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
263
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
E174588
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Brake and Rear Lamps, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp
E220463
C
BA
D
2
Rear side marker lamp.A
Tail lamp.B
Reversing lamp.C
Brake and tail lamp.Rear
direction indicator.
D
1
E220462
1. Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly. Gently pull the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
•Front side marker lamps.
•Side direction indicator.
•Central high mounted brake lamp.
•Stop and tail lamp. (If equipped)
264
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
License Plate Lamp
E220617 1
2
3
1. Remove the screws that secure the
lens to the lamp housing.
2. Remove the lamp lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
27/93157NA
Front direction indicator.
Front parking lamps.
55/659008 H13
Headlamp low beam.
Headlamp high beam.
55H11Front fog lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
5194Rear side marker lamp.
5194Rear lamp.
27/33157K
Brake and rear lamp.
Rear direction indicator.
LEDLEDOptional stop and rear lamp.
265
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
16921Reversing lamps.
5C5WLLicense plate lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
266
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter
the air induction system. Engine
components are susceptible to damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 447).
Incorrect component use can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page
303).
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
E200522
1. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
267
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
WSS-M99P43-BMotorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
268
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
•Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
•Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
•Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
•When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
•Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
•Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
•Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
•Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
•Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
•Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
•Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
269
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
•Roof racks.
•Bumpers.
•Grained door handles.
•Side moldings.
•Mirror housings.
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
270
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
•Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
•For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
•Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as
these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
•If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 272).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
271
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
•Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
•Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
•Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
•Household cleaners.
•Alcohol solutions.
•Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
272
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS (If
Equipped)
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
•Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
•Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
273
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
•Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
•We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
•Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
274
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
•Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
•If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of
your vehicle and the ground is less than
that of other models. Drive with extreme
care to avoid damage to your vehicle.
275
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Ford dealer to have the system
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the
size of the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 278).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver’s seating position.
Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination, if equipped.
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
E145298
276
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
•Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
•Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
•Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
277
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
278
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
279
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
280
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
281
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed ratingLetter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
282
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
283
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
BC
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
284
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
BCDE
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
285
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You
will find a Tire Label containing
the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
The Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure is also found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
286
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
287
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which
288
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver's door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
For a mounting pressure
more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford dealer or other
tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.
WARNINGS
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
•Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
•Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
•Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
•Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
289
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
290
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page
447).
E142547
291
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury,
and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case, or power transfer unit failure. It is also
strongly advised to follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
•If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
•Use only SAE Class S snow chains,
snow cables or equivalent on the front
axle for P235/60R17, P235/60R18, and
P235/55R19 equipped vehicles. The
use of snow chains, snow cables or
other traction assist devices that are
larger than SAE Class S may cause
damage to your vehicle’s wheel house,
suspension and/or body.
•Do not install tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices on the rear
tires. This could cause damage to the
vehicle’s wheel house or body.
•Do not use tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices with
255/45R20 tires.
•Install cable chains securely, verifying
that the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
•Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with
tire cables on your vehicle.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the cables. If this does
not work, remove the cables to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
•Remove the tire cables when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
cables on dry roads.
292
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
293
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
294
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
295
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 293). If the tire
pressure monitor sensor becomes
damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 293). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
296
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
•Tow a trailer.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer.
•Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
•Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent your vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P) or neutral (N), set the parking brake,
and block (in both directions) the wheel
that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of your vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
297
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Note: If the third row seat is stowed in the
floor, you will need to unstow it to access
the spare tire.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
E211099
4. Remove the carpeted floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle, then
remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
6. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket by
turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the jack kit from the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack, L-shaped bolt, and
the wrench from the felt bag. Fold
down the wrench socket to use to
loosen the lug nuts and to operate the
jack.
298
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
8. Remove the wheel cover with the lug
wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug
nut one-half turn counterclockwise,
but do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
E145908
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E201156
10. Put the jack in the jack notch next to
the tire you are changing. Turn the
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
11. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
12. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
13. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
34
5
E75442
14. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
300).
15. Install the wheel cover.
Stowing the flat tire
E194296
299
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
If you are stowing the flat tire, remove the
L-shaped bolt from the external pocket of
the felt bag. With the third row seat in the
raised position, stand the flat tire in the
rear of the vehicle with the tire’s valve stem
facing the rear of the vehicle. Fasten the
flat tire to the vehicle by inserting the
L-shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt
holes in the wheel. Turn it clockwise into
the threaded hole in the vehicle until the
tire is secured.
If you are stowing the temporary spare tire,
place the tire over the jack and secure it
with the large wing nut.
Stowing the jack
E211100
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the lug
wrench socket into the handle and
place the jack and wrench into the felt
bag. Place the extension bolt or
L-shaped bolt into the external pocket
of the felt bag. Position the jack as
shown to make sure that the locating
holes in the jack base can be placed on
the locating tabs of the jack mounting
bracket in the spare tire tub.
2. Securely close the wrench
compartment and the jack bag using
the Velcro™ straps.
3. Place the jack kit on the angled bracket
in the spare tire tub, using the locating
tabs to position the jack correctly.
E211101
4. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With
the jack in place, place the looped end
of the retention bracket over the
threaded stud in the trunk floor and
secure it with the plastic wing nut.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
300
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting
surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle
is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm) *Bolt size
100 lb.ft (135 Nm)1/2 x 20
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
301
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
3.5L V6Engine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.8:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L Engine
E191904
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L EcoBoostEngine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
302
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
3.5L EcoBoostEngine
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.030–0.033 in (0.75–0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.0:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L EcoBoost Engine
E191904
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-650Battery
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2301 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
303
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Part NumberComponent
WW-2103 (passenger side)
WW-1202Rear window wiper blade
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 447).
304
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-534Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2301 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2103 (passenger side)
WW-1202Rear window wiper blade
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 447).
305
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
306
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
GSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
307
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.2 qt (12.5 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
10.9 qt (10.3 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid
2.43 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
2.31 lb (1.05 kg)A/C refrigerant
8.96 fl oz (265 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
308
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1Optional motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-B1Optional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
309
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-19-R
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
310
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C947-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP
311
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240522
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.7 qt (13 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
11.6 qt (11 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid
2.43 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
312
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
2.45 lb (1.11 kg)A/C refrigerant
7.95 fl oz (235 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1Optional motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-B1Optional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
313
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
CXT-10-LV12
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-19-R
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
314
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-A1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP
315
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
316
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
•AM: 530-1710 kHz
•FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in
Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
317
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
•MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
•MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
318
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
E210707
A B
O
NM
LK
J
E
I
H
C
F
G
D
RADIO: Press to listen to the
radio or change radio stations.
Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.
A
CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press
the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen
options of Repeat or Shuffle.
B
Number block: In radio mode,
store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then
press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode,
select a track. In phone mode,
enter a phone number.
C
Function buttons: Select
different functions of the audio
system depending on which
mode you are in (for example
Radio mode or CD mode).
D
TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.
E
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
F
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
319
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
OK and cursor arrows: Press
the up and down arrow buttons
to select the various settings.
When you make your selection,
press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set, or press MENU
to exit.
G
Eject: Press to eject a CD.H
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
I
Clock: Press to access the clock
setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and
minutes. You can also set the
clock by pressing MENU and
scrolling to Clock Settings. If not
in phone mode, press to display
the clock.
J
SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When
you make your selection, press
K
the left and right arrow buttons
to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source
independently.
MENU: Press to access different
audio system features. See
Menu Structure.
L
PHONE: Press to access the
phone features of the SYNC
system. See your SYNC
information.
M
AUX: Press to access or switch
between devices you plug into
your vehicle.
N
SIRIUS: Press to listen to
SIRIUS satellite radio.
O
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
320
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
Radio
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.
Manual Tune
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
AST
Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
Set Category for Seek/Scan
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
RDS Text Display
SIRIUS
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS to activate, modify or track your account.
Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel.
Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by
pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Check Channel Guide
Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Set Category for Seek/Scan
Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Alerts
Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock All Stations
Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip No Stations
Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental Lockout
321
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7 or off, low, medium and high.
Speed Compensated
Volume
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
Sound
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
Occupancy Mode
Choose between stereo and surround. Only with the
external sound systems.
Sound Mode
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder
Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
CD Compression
Clock Settings
Select to set the time and calendar date.Set Date and Time
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
24 Hour
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.Brightness
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp. Setting
322
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
E210708
A
E D
B C
Eject: Press to eject a CD.A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
TUNE: In radio mode, press to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
press to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.
C
323
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
D
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
E
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen controls most of
the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
E210709
324
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
SOURCE: Press to access
different audio modes, for
example AM, FM and CD.
A
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
B
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
Sound: Press to access settings
for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
C
TUNE: In radio mode, press to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
press to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.
D
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
E
USB PORT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E205592
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
325
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your
portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist.*
•Use applications, such as Spotify, via
SYNC AppLink.**
•Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected
phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
•Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*These features are not available in all
markets and require activation.
**Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
326
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
327
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
•After pressing the voice button, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the
system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice button.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 77).
When prompted you can say any of the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Stream audio from your phone.Bluetooth Audio
Cancel the requested action.Cancel
Access mobile applications.mobile (apps | applica-
tions)
Make calls.Phone
Access the device connected to your USB port.USB [1]
328
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback.Voice Settings | Voice
Preferences
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.Help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or
stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed
by either apps or applications.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 77).
When prompted say the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Voice Settings | Voice Preferences
Followed by either of the following:
Provide more detailed interaction and guidance.Interaction Mode
Standard
Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
329
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
correct?". If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and may ask you to confirm
settings.
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the command; you may still occa-
sionally be asked to confirm settings.
Confirmation Prompts
Off
Clarify your voice command with a short question.Confirmation Prompts
On
The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, it may prompt you with
as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Media Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for media candidates.Media Candidate Lists On
Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Phone Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for phone candidates.Phone Candidate Lists
On
330
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cell
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Using privacy mode.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, see your cell phone's manual
and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 1,000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with
SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired,
do the following:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.NO PHONE
FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
331
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions, such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically
tries to connect with first upon vehicle
start-up) and downloading your
phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
ActionMessage
Press the OK button.PHONE SETNGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.
ADD DEVICE
FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say:
Voice Commands
Phone
You can then say any of the following
commands.
Call History Incoming
Call History Missed
Call History Outgoing
Voice Commands
Phonebook ___
Phonebook ___ at Home
Phonebook ___ at Work
Phonebook ___ in Office
Phonebook ___ on Cell
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
332
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
You can also say any of the following:
Voice Command
Call ___
Call ___ at Home
Call ___ at Work
Call ___ in Office
Call ___ on Mobile
Call ___ on Other
Dial
None of these commands are available
until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
The following commands are only
available during active calls:
Voice Commands
Go To Privacy
Hold
Join
Phone Menu Commands
To access the phone menu with voice
commands, press the voice button and
when prompted say:
Voice Command
[Phone] Menu
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Voice Command
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
On
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
Off
[Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off
Battery
Phone Name
Signal
Text Message Inbox
Send [New] Text Message
You do not need to say word contained
within brackets for the system to
understand your command.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press MENU to go to the
PHONE menu.
Phonebook Commands
When you ask SYNC to access content, for
example the phonebook name or number,
the requested information appears in the
display to view.
333
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This command is not available until your cell phone informa-
tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Call ___
Use to enter a phone number digit by digit.Dial
When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands:
To confirm the number and initiate the call.Dial
To erase the last spoken digit. You can also press the left
arrow button.
delete
To erase all spoken digits. You can also press and hold the
left arrow button.
clear
To end a call, press and hold the red phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
•Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
•Reject the call by pressing and holding
the red phone button.
•Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, for
example putting a call on hold or joining
calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.CALL MENU
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to switch a call from an active hands-free envir-
onment to your cell phone for a more private conversation.
PRIVACY
Press the OK button to put an active call on hold.CALL HOLD
Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three callers
on a multiparty call or conference call.
JOIN CALLS
334
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands
to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until the following
message appears.
Press the OK button.JOIN CALLS
Enter tones such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired
number appears in the display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
ENTER TONES
To access your phonebook contacts.PHONEBOOK
1. Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through your
phonebook contacts.
2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in
the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the contact.
To access your call history log.CALL HISTORY
1. Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your call history
options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
Accessing Features Through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and
phonebook and sends text messages as
well as access cell phone and system
settings. You can also access advanced
features such as 911 Assist.
335
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to redial the last number called.PHONE REDIAL
Press the OK button again to confirm.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you
connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC.
PHONE REDIAL
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
INCOMING
OUTGOING
MISSED
The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook
and call history each time your cell phone connects to SYNC (if the
auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
supports this feature).
To browse your phonebook select:PHONEBOOK
Press OK. Scroll down or up to the
desired name and press OK.
BROWSE
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phone-
book name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK. The phone
number that is stored under the
selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.
To search for a contact in your phone book select:
Press OK.SEARCH
Scroll down until you see the first letter
of your phonebook entry. Press OK.
Scroll down until you see the second
letter of your desired phonebook entry.
Press OK.
336
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Repeat entering letters to narrow your
search. When you are satisfied with
your entry press the right arrow key on
the bezel.
SYNC will jump to the phonebook
contact name that matches your entry.
Press OK.
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phone-
book name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK.
The phone number that is stored under
the selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.
Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text
messages.1
TEXT MESSAGE
View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your message
notification, change phonebook entries and automatically download
your cell phone content among other features. 1
PHONE SETNGS
Automatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator following
a crash. 2
911 Assist
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smart-
phone.
APPLICATIONS
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings and advanced menu listings.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button to exit the phone menu.EXIT MENU
1 This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
2 This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only
Text Messaging
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
337
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text
message.
When a new text message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the information
display indicates you have a new message.
Following the notification you can do
any of the following:
Do nothing to have the message go into
your text message inbox.
To have SYNC read you the message using voice commands, press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
SYNC will read the most recent text message to you.Read Message | Read
Text Message | Text
Message
To open the test message, press OK to
receive and open the text message. Press
OK again and SYNC reads your message
aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose
whether you’d like to reply or forward the
message.
Reply or forward the message, press OK and scroll to choose between:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.
REPLY TO MSG
Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose enter a
number.
FORWARD MSG
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone is compatible,
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages.
Note: Sending a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: You can only have one recipient per
text message.
338
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.TEXT MESSAGE
Select one of the following:
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-
defined set of 15 messages.
SEND MSG?
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to your desired message.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter
a new number.
5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact.
6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you
would like to send the message. The system sends each
text message with the following signature: This message
was sent from my Ford.
Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To
download the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates the system is downloading your messages.
When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the
inbox.
DOWNLOAD MSG
Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To
delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text
messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
DELETE ALL
Press the OK button to exit the current menu.RETURN
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are cell phone-dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust some features. For
example ring tones, text message
notification, modify your phonebook and
set up automatic download.
339
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.PHONE
SETNGS
Select one of the following:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming
status of your connected cell phone.
PHONE
STATUS
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When done,
press OK again to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You can choose
one of the system ring tones or your cell phone ring tones.
SET RINGER
Press the OK button and scroll to hear the available options. You can
also choose to use to use your phone's ring tone.
Press the OK button to select the desired ring tone. If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays when you choose
the phone ringer option.
You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a
text message arrives.
MSG NTFY
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
MSG NTFY ON
MSG NTFY OFF
Modify the contents of your phone book (such as add, delete, down-
load). Press OK to select and scroll between:
MODIFY
PHONEBOOK
Press the OK button to add more contacts from your
phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell
phone. See your cell phone's manual on how to push
contacts.
ADD
CONTACTS
Press OK to delete the current phone book and call
history. When Delete Phonebook appears, press OK
to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
DELETE
PHONEBOOK
Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
DOWNLOAD
PHONEBOOK
Automatically download your phone book each time your phone
connects to SYNC. Press OK to select.
AUTODOWN-
LOAD
340
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
When this message appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each time.
AUTO ON?
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every
time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook,
call history and text messages can only be accessed
when your specific phone is connected to SYNC.1
When enabled, SYNC speaks the contact name that is displayed on
the screen during phonebook browsing.
SPEAK NAMES
Exit the current menu.RETURN
1 Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. When Auto
Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download.
System Settings
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
cell phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press the Phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
Select one of the following:
See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 331). 1
ADD DEVICE
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone. 2
CONNECT BT
Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones.
Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK to
connect the phone.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone. 4
SET PRIMARY?
Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.
Press OK to confirm.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. 4
BT ON/OFF
341
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When the
desired selection is chosen, press OK.
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices
and turns off all Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired cell phone.DEL DEVICE
Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK
to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all information
originally saved with those phones).
DELETE ALL
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
1 This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2 You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
3 SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone
is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
4 Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth
features.
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.
To access the advanced menu, press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu,
the scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press OK.SYS SETTINGS
Press OK.ADVANCED
Select one of the following:
Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking you for
a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off:
PROMPTS
342
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between On and
Off.
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. Choose
between English, Français and Español. Once selected, all of the
radio displays and prompts are in the selected language.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. If you
change the language setting, the display indicates that the system
is updating. When complete, SYNC returns you to the Advanced
menu.
LANGUAGES
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase
your indexed information, for example phonebook, call history, text
messages or paired devices.
DEFAULTS
Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when the
following message appears in the display.
RESTORE?
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example
phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices, and return
the system to the factory default settings.
MASTER
RESET
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete. SYNC returns
you to the Advanced menu.
Press OK to select.SYNC REBOOT
Press OK to select. You only need to press
the OK button once. SYNC will be unre-
sponsive for 2-4 minutes while it is
rebooting. Wait 2-4 minutes before
attempting to execute a SYNC command.
CONFIRM REBOOT?
Install applications you have downloaded.INSTALL APP
Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button to
confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number.SYSTEM INFO
Press the OK button to select.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
343
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
•911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 44). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 221).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
344
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.911 Assist
Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.
On
Off
Off selections include:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Off with reminder:
Provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at
phone connection.
Off without reminder:
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
345
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
SYNC™ APPLINK™
SYNC Mobile Apps
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port in order to start the
application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available
if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord
Touch system.
Note: Depending on your display type, you
can access AppLink from the media menu,
the phone menu, or by using voice
commands. Once an app is running through
AppLink, you can control main features of
the app through voice commands and
steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button to access the
SYNC phone menu on-screen. You can
then scroll to:
Menu item
Press OK to access a list
of available applications.
Mobile Apps
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
press OK to select a
particular app. Once an
app is running through
SYNC, you can access an
app’s menu by pressing the
MENU button to first
access the SYNC menu.
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, sticher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
To Access Using the Media Menu
Press the AUX button on the center
console.
346
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press the OK button.SYNC-Media
Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available
applications and select your desired app.
Mobile Apps
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, Stitcher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and descriptionVoice command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC,
you can press the voice button and speak commands specific
to the app, for example, "Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Apps
You can also say the following:
To discover the available voice commands.The name of an app
(such as Stitcher)
followed by "help".
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports the
following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
347
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 325).
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands. See Media voice commands.
USB [1]
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
USB[1]appears, you can say USB or USB one.
To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 325).
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SELECT SRC
Press the OK button.SYNC USB
Depending on how many digital media files are on your
connected device, the following message may appear in the
radio display.
Indexing…
When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play menu. You can then
select one of the following:
PLAY ALL
ARTISTS
ALBUMS
GENRES
PLAYLISTS
TRACKS
EXPLORE USB
SIMILARMUSIC
Exit the current menu.RETURN
348
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
What's Playing?
When a track is playing, you can ask the
system to tell you what is currently playing.
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track,
and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell
you what track is playing.
Whats This? | Whats
Playing?
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where text shows: (what's | what is) playing, you must say; "what's playing"
or "what is playing".
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
USB [1]
You can then say any of the following
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
Play All
1,2
Play Artist ___
1,2
Play Album ___
1,2
Play Genre ___
3
[Play] Next Folder
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
Voice command
1,2
Play Playlist ___
3
[Play] Previous Folder
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
1,2
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
Repeat [On]
Repeat Off
Shuffle [On]
Shuffle Off
1,2
Search Album ___
1,2
Search Artist ___
349
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Voice command
1,2
The system searches all
the data from your
indexed music and, if
available, begins to play
the chosen type of music.
You can only play genres
of music which are present
in the GENRE metadata
tags that you have on your
digital media player.
Search
Genre ___
1,2
The system searches for a
specific artist/track/album
from the music indexed
through the USB port.
Search
Track ___
| Search
Song ___
1,2
This allows you to make
your previous command
more specific. By using this
command you can filter
though a previous selec-
tion, such as an artist to
play only specific album.
Refine
album ___
The system compiles a
playlist and then plays similar
music to what is currently
playing from the USB port
using indexed metadata
information.
Similar
Music
Voice command
Autoplay Off
Turn autoplay on to listen to
music processed during
indexing. Turn autoplay off to
allow the indexing process to
finish before the system plays
any of your music.
Autoplay
[on]
1 ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
2 This voice command is not available until
indexing is complete.
3 This voice command is only available in
folder mode.
Bluetooth Audio Command Guide
Press the voice button and say:
Voice command
Bluetooth Audio
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music, for
example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,
and to add, connect or delete devices.
350
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Press the AUX button, then the Menu button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore
USB to view the supported digital music
files on your playing device.
PLAY MENU
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also
plug in devices to charge them (if supported
by your device). Once connected, the
system indexes any readable media files.1
SYNC USBSELECT SRC
Press the OK button. This is a phone-
dependent feature that allows you to
stream music playing on your Bluetooth-
enabled phone. If supported by your device,
you can press seek to play the previous or
next track.
SYNC BT
Press the OK button to select and play
music from your portable music player over
your vehicle's speakers.2
SYNC LINE IN
(If Equipped)
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Auto-
play settings. Once you turn these selections on, they remain
on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the previous or
next track.3
MEDIA SETTIN
Press the OK button to shuffle available
media files in the current playlist. To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All
in the play menu and then select Shuffle.
SHUFFLE
Press the OK button to repeat any song.REPEAT
351
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to
listen to music processed during indexing.
Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing
process to finish before the system plays
any of your music.4
AUTOPLAY
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
APPLICATIONS
Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as
Advanced menu listings.
SYS SETTINGS
Press OK to exit the media menu.EXIT MENU
1The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs
to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay
is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum
indexing file size.
2If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data
and music separately.
3Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately.
4Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.
Make sure that your device is plugged into
the USB port and is turned on.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.PLAY MENU
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are
media files, you have the following options:
Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the
display.
PLAY ALL
352
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in
flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. If
there are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists
them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
ARTISTS
1. Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255
indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes
them alphabetically.
ALBUMS
1. Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button.
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the
genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
GENRES
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button.
Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them
alphabetically.
PLAYLISTS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your
tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
TRACKS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button.
353
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media content
which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not
visible.
EXPLORE USB
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.
Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB
port. The system uses the metadata information of each song
to compile a playlist for you.*
SIMILARMUSIC
1. Press the OK button.
2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins
playing. This feature does not include tracks with incom-
plete metadata information. Press the OK button.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
*With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not
available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these
tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice
recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items
into any unpopulated metadata tag.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to enable, disable, add, connect and delete
a Bluetooth device.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
You can then select one of the following:
Pair more devices to the system.*
ADD DEVICE
354
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the
display, press the OK button again.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your
phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the
display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.Connect BT
1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK to
connect the device.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.**
BT ON/OFF
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button.
Delete a paired media device.DEL DEVICE
1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Delete all previously paired devices.DELETE ALL
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
*This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
**Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth
features.
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
355
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.ADVANCED
You can then select one of the following:
Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or
ask you for a specific action.
PROMPTS
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button. SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Choose from the available languages. The displays and
prompts are in the selected language.
LANGUAGES
1. Press the OK button and scroll through the available
languages.
2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears
in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages and paired devices.
DEFAULTS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in
the display, press the OK button again to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices
will be deleted and the system will return to the factory
default settings.
MASTER RESET
Download available software applications through the USB
port.
INSTALL APP
Exit the current menu.RETURN
356
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts. If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
357
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
358
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
359
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
360
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
When I select "Find New
Apps," SYNC does not find
any applications.
paired and connected to
361
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit" or "Quit"
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting "Apps."
then finding the particular
app and choosing "Force
stop." Don't forget to restart
the app afterwards, then
select "Find New Apps" on
SYNC.
362
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android OS. This bug may
cause apps that were found
the last time your phone
connected to SYNC not to
be found again if you have
not turned off bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
363
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
364
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
E205444
365
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.
HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 415).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside
Temperature
D
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.
366
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
E249671
i
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.
Driver Temper-
ature
A
When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.
Heated steering
wheel
B
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.
Passenger
Temperature
C
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.
Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
367
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software
update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays the phone signal strength and the
roaming signal strength.
Signal StrengthI
This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.
Text MessageJ
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.
911 Assist OffK
This icon displays when a phone call is active.In-CallL
This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.
BluetoothM
Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.
Phone
368
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
Apps
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or
electric this is also where your settings and
power information is located.
You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 379).
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some
of the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible the right
hand display (A).
369
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
E208626
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3
screen:
InformationOption
Information for current audio playing.Entertain-
ment Select source.
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Naviga-
tion View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster
level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to
cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is
shown.
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting:1
Phone
370
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
InformationOption
Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll calls
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand
steering wheel controls.
1 Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
•Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
•Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
•Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
•Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
•While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
•While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
•While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
•While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 75).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
371
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
•Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
•VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
•Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
•Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
•SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
•SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
•1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 317).
•DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
•Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 114).
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, by visiting:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
372
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 415).
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
373
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
•For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
•Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
•Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
•All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following table for more specific
examples.
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
374
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
•Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.
Please reference the website for any
further actions.
375
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 415). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 430).
If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
When the system is connected via Wi-Fi
and automatic updates are enabled, your
system checks for software updates
periodically. If a new version is available, it
downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
376
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 415). System
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company do not access the system data
for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company.
HOME SCREEN
377
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
E209015
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains
the compass.
Displays the current setting of the passenger heated or
climate controlled seats.
*
Passenger
Heated and
Climate
Controlled
Seats
B
This icon does not display if your vehicle has hard button
controls for heated and climate controlled seats.
If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, this option
displays under the audio information.
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen.
The status of the phone features also appear. This includes
signal strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On
or Off), text messaging and roaming.
PhoneC
378
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Home screen displayTileItem
Displays the current setting of the heated or climate
controlled driver seat.
*
Driver
Heated and
Climate
Controlled
Seats
D
This icon does not display if your vehicle has hard button
controls for heated and climate controlled seats.
If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, this option
displays under the audio information.
This map displays your current location or current route in
real time.
*
NavigationE
When you have navigation active, you also see the next
turn and the length of time and distance to your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains
the audio information.
* If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
379
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Help
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-
connected device.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
380
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).
Set Temperature ___
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 415).
Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
381
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
382
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.
Find the Nearest
<POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous
Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
383
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app, followed by
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
384
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Call Confirmation On
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Call Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
385
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
E205443
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
PresetsC
386
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
1
SIRIUS
1
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and descrip-
tion
Menu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
387
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
388
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 415).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 415).
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
389
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Siri-
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 415).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
390
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
391
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
392
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
1 You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
393
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
394
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 412).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
395
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 415).
E208805
396
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Driver temperature: Touch up
or down to adjust the
temperature.
A
Heated steering wheel: Touch
the heated steering wheel icon
to switch the heated steering
wheel on and off (if equipped).
B
Defrost: A pop up appears on
the screen to display the defrost
options.
C
MAX Defrost: Touch the button
to maximize defrosting. Outside
air flows through the windshield
vents, the fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed and
the temperature dial returns to
the full heat position. You can
use this setting to defog or clear
a thin covering of ice from the
windshield. The heated rear
window also automatically turns
on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Touch to clear the
windshield of fog and thin ice.
Touch again to return to the
previous airflow selection. When
on, defrost provides outside air
to reduce window fogging and
distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and
demister vents.
Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when Defrost is
on.
Heated rear window: Turns the
heated rear window on and off.
See the Heated Windows and
Mirrors chapter in your owner
manual.
AUTO: Touch the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Select the desired temperature
using the temperature control.
The system adjusts fan speed,
air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside
air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to
maintain the desired
temperature.
D
Power: Touch the button to
switch the system on and off.
Switching off the climate control
system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.
E
DUAL: This button lights up
when the passenger controls are
active. To switch the dual zone
operation off and link the
passenger temperature to the
driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button to switch it off.
F
Passenger temperature:
Touch up or down to adjust the
temperature.
G
Passenger heated and
climate controlled seats:
H
Touch the heated seat icon to
adjust the heated seat off and
on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled
seat icon to adjust the
climate-controlled seat off and
on (if equipped).
Fan speed: Touch up or down
to increase or decrease the
volume of air circulated in your
vehicle.
I
Rear: A pop up appears on the
screen to display the rear control
options.
J
397
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Touch the power icon to switch
the rear climate control
functions off and on.
Touch Rear Control to allow
the rear seat passengers to
adjust the rear climate settings.
Touch it again to prevent the rear
seat passengers from adjusting
the settings. Rear Control
automatically turns off when you
use the touchscreen to adjust
the rear climate settings.
If your vehicle has automatic
climate controls, select Auto to
connect the rear climate settings
to the Auto settings of the driver.
Touch the up and down arrows
to adjust the temperature.
Manual airflow distribution
controls: Select these controls
individually or together to direct
the air flow to the desired area.
K
Panel: Distributes air through
the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the
demister vents, floor vents and
rear seat floor vents.
A/C: A pop-up appears on the
screen to display the air
conditioning options.
L
MAX A/C: Touch to cool your
vehicle with recirculated air.
Touch again for normal A/C
operation. MAX A/C distributes
air through instrument panel
vents and may help reduce odors
from entering your vehicle. MAX
A/C is more economical and
efficient than normal A/C mode.
A/C: Touch to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency. A/C engages
automatically in MAX A/C,
defrost and footwell/defrost.
Recirculated air: Touch to
switch the recirculated air on or
off which may reduce the
amount of time needed to cool
down the interior and help
reduce odors from reaching the
interior. Recirculated air also
engages automatically when you
select MAX A/C. You can engage
this manually in any airflow
mode except defrost. It may also
turn off in all airflow modes
except MAX A/C to reduce fog
potential.
Driver heated and climate
controlled seats:
M
Touch the heated seat icon to
adjust the heated seat off and
on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled
seat icon to adjust the
climate-controlled seat off and
on (if equipped).
398
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
PHONE
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Dialing a number.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller identification.
399
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Websites
owner.ford.com
Websites
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
E205447
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent Call
List
A
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
400
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
ContactsB
Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
Phone
Settings
C
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Settings (page 415).
Displays all recent text messages.Text
Messages
D
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone
Keypad
E
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a
call.
Call
Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail.
Calls are rejected if you do not have voicemail set up on your
phone. New text message notifications are not displayed on the
screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not
Disturb
F
Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Note: Certain features are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is moving.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 379). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
401
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. The
system logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
•Signal Strength.
•Battery.
•911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 415).
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
402
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press and hold
the button on the
steering wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Mute
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
•Make calls.
•Send and receive messages.
•Listen to music.
•Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 325).
403
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the
touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple
CarPlay.
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.
2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See
USB Port (page 325).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on
your device.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device. This may
require mobile data usage.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.
404
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.
You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
E251780
E251779
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
415).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:
405
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
406
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destina-
tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Select this option to remove all previous destinations.Delete
All
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:
Home
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:
Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.Favorites
To add Favorites:
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
bar.
Add a
Favorite
Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.
Search
Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.
Save
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
configuration):
Point of Interest
(POI) Categories
Food
407
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.
See All
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Start
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.
Cancel
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
Start
408
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Highway
Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
409
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 415).Navigation
Settings
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.
Cancel Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:
GoTo return to
your route
press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:
410
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order
for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
SYNC AppLink
The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.
First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to update
points of interest (POI) on the navigation
system.
Send To Car
You can send destinations to your
navigation system using a computer or
phone using AppLink.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
411
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•Restaurant
•Business center
•Handicap facilities
•Laundry
•Refrigerator
•24 hour room service
•Fitness center
•Internet access
•Pool
•Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 412).
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.
412
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or
favorites.We recommend you do this at
home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
413
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 415).
App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
414
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
415
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.
Speed
Compensated
Vol.
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
such as genre, artist and album.
Gracenote®
Management
416
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Data-
base Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.
Device Informa-
tion
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.Update Media
Index
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone
Update This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
ActionMenu Item
OnBluetooth
Off
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
417
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.
Add a Bluetooth
Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
418
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
Connect
Disconnect
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Press the info icon next to the device name
to see phone and device information.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Auto-Download
Contacts
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
Sort By:
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download
Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ring-
tone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
419
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in
Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.
Roaming
Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
Low Battery
Notification
911 Assist
Enabling 911 Assist
Note: For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and connect
with SYNC3.
To activate 911 Assist from the settings
screen select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can
switch this feature on and off by sliding the scrollbar as follows.
911 Assist
Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature
on.
You can set your contacts in the phone
book for emergency quick dialing.
Setting Emergency Contacts
Ensure the phone book of your cell phone
downloaded to SYNC 3.
From the settings screen select:
420
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature.911 Assist
Select this option as it displays on the screen.Set Emergency
Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this option under <Emergency contact 1>.Select a
Contact
The screen lists contacts in the phone
book. Select the contact that you want to
set as emergency contact. You can set
Emergency Contact 2 by same process.
You can set two Emergency Contacts in
total.
Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an
emergency call, the Emergency Contact
button displays on the touch screen. You
need to press the button to call the contact
through your Bluetooth phone.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
navigation, a map with your current street
information displays on the screen when 911
Assist is in process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Avail-
able)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets
(AST) Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
421
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM
This button is available if SiriusXM is the
active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following
features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that
category.
Set Category for
Seek
Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows
you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental
Lockout
Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an
alert or delete all alerts.
Edit Alerts
You can also view your satellite radio
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this
screen. You need this number when
communicating with SiriusXM to activate,
modify or track your account.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Prefer-
ences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
3D City Model
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
Breadcrumbs
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon is displayed on the map regardless of this setting.
POI Icons
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.
Incident Map
Icons
422
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Prefer-
ences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
Always Use ___
Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Use HOV Lanes
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.
Automatically
Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Eco Time
Penalty
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Dynamic Route
Guidance
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Pref-
erences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance
Prompts
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only
423
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Source Selection
The screen lists available alternative
navigation sources using Applink.
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.
The connected devices send data to Ford
Motor Company in the United States. The
encrypted information includes your VIN,
SYNC 3 module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.
Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible
with the system.
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any
additional charges you may receive from
your service provider, when your vehicle
sends or receives data through the
connected device.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
OnMobile Apps
Off Disabling mobile apps in the
settings menu disables auto-
matic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
Update Mobile
Apps
There are three possible statuses:
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive
an update.
No update is
required.
The system has
detected a new app
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
424
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford Motor Company is not
responsible or liable for any damages or loss
of privacy relating to usage of an app, or
dissemination of any vehicle data that you
approve Ford Motor Company to provide to
an app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.
Menu Item
Select to have the touch-
screen display in English,
Spanish or French.
Language
Select to display units in
kilometers or miles.
Distance
Select to display units in
Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Temperature
Select to have the system
beep to confirm choices
made through the touch-
screen.
Touch Screen Beep
425
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
When you activate this
option, the system auto-
matically updates when
you have an available
Internet connection
through a Wi-Fi network or
mobile connection.
Automatic System Updates
Information pertaining to
the system and its soft-
ware.
About SYNC
Documentation of the
software license for the
system.
Software Licenses
Select to restore factory
defaults. This erases all
personal settings and
personal data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi & Hotspot
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
System Wi-Fi
You can access the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.Available
Networks Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Wi-Fi Available
Notifications
426
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped) You can access the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.Wi-Fi Hotspot
On/Off
Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.
Settings
Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.Data Usage
Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.Manage Devices
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.
Note: It is the account owner’s
responsibility to remove the vehicle from
the vehicle network carrier account when
ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier for more
information.
Note: Data, such as the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID,
and data plan usage, is shared between
Ford Motor Company and the vehicle
network carrier to provide the Vehicle
Hotspot service in accordance with your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability, and may be used to enable
a seamless transition from an old to new
embedded modem and to confirm any
updates are successfully delivered.
Note: For your convenience data usage may
be available for monitoring under Settings
but may not reflect actual or current usage.
The vehicle network carrier is responsible
for providing information about your
account. Please contact the vehicle network
carrier for more information.
Note: Ford Motor Company may need to
update operating system software on your
vehicle, including security updates and bug
fixes, to keep connected services current,
like Vehicle Hotspot, without prior notice to
you.
Note: If you do not have an active vehicle
hotspot data plan, open your web browser
and go to a website using the HTTP protocol
to be automatically redirected to the vehicle
network carrier landing page where you can
purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will
not automatically redirect.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
427
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Vehicle
Note: You vehicle may not have all of these
features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera
Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen
to switch it back on.
Display Off
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Auto
428
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Night
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Auto Dim
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove
additional voice prompts
and confirmations.
Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have
the system confirm a
contacts name with you
before making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have
the system display a list of
available voice commands
when the voice button is
pressed.
Voice Command List
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.
For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
429
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.
The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.
There is back-
ground noise
during a phone
call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person
but they cannot
hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to
be restarted.
During a call, I
cannot hear the
other person
and they cannot
hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not
able to down-
load my phone-
book.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Limitations on your cell
phone's capability.
The system
says "Phone-
book down-
loaded" but my
SYNC 3 phone-
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.
430
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
iPhone •Go to your cell phone's Settings.
•Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
•Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
•Turn Show Notifications on.
•Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
431
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
This is a cell phone limita-
tion.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunc-
tion.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
your vehicle during very hot or cold
temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
my device when
I start my
vehicle.
432
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.
This is a device-
dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio
does not
stream.
The device is not
connected.
Try switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
The device is in a bad
state.
Make sure that all song details are popu-
lated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
music that is on
my device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.
The file may be
corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
The song may have
copyright protection that
does not allow it to play.
Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 386).
The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.
Update media index. See Settings (page
415).
The device needs to be
re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect
my device, I
sometimes do
not hear any
sound.
433
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
select AirPlay from the devices Control
Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Connect a compatible device or media
player.
The device or media
player is incompatible.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
song informa-
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connec-
tion. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.
Multiple Access points
within range with the
same SSID.
Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
with the front of the vehicle facing the
hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interfer-
ence.
Weak signal probably
due to distance from the
hotspot, obstruction or
high interference.
Disconnecting
after successful
connection.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated
windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not facing the
hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
There may be an
obstruction between
SYNC 3 and the hotspot.
Poor signal seen
by SYNC 3
despite being
near a hotspot.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
434
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Please set the network to visible and try
again.
The hotspot was defined
as a hidden network.
A hotspot is not
listed in the list
of available
networks.
SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
hotspot.
SYNC 3 does not
currently provide a
hotspot.
SYNC 3 is not
seen when
searching for
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.
Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excel-
lent, test with another high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more
predictable.
Poor signal strength, too
far from the hotspot,
hotspot is supporting
multiple connections,
slow Internet connection
or other problems.
Software down-
load takes too
long.
Test the connection with another device, if
the hotspot requires a subscription, you
may contact the service provider.
It is possible that there is
no new software. The
connected hotspot may
be a managed one and it
requires either a
subscription or agreeing
to the terms and condi-
tions.
SYNC 3 seems
to connect with
a hotspot and
the signal
strength is
excellent but
the software is
not being
updated.
435
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a compatible smart-
phone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
iPhone users must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB cable.
You did not connect an
Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
"Find Mobile
Apps," SYNC 3
does not find
any applica-
tions.
Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
is running on your phone. Some apps
require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps
are not installed and
running on your mobile
device.
My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
Sometimes apps do not
properly close and re-
open their connection to
SYNC 3, over ignition
cycles, for example.
My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I
still cannot find
any apps. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.
436
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-
connect to your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions
of the Android operating
system that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle
drive to not be found
again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
and restart it.
You may need to reset
the USB connection to
SYNC 3.
My iPhone is
connected, my
app is running, I
restarted the
app but I still
cannot find it on
SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
device by using the device's volume control
buttons which are most often found on the
side of the device.
The Bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an
Android phone.
I found and
started my
media app on
SYNC 3, but
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
app's settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices
have a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that
apps can use to connect.
If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than
the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps
Menu.
437
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
what I am
saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.
Review the media voice commands at the
beginning of the media section.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
the name of a
song or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The contact name may
contain special charac-
ters.
438
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-
speech voice prompt
technology.
The system
generates voice
prompts and
the pronunci-
ation of some
words may not
be accurate for
my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
439
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Personal Profiles have not been set up.
I cannot create a profile.
An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
I cannot link a keyfob.
The keyfob selected was already associ-
ated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.
A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.
My personalized settings do not save. A different Personal Profile is active than
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.
440
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
The keyfob being used is not linked to a
profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
Personal Profiles is turned off.My preset positions recall but my profile
does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not. The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
I lost a keyfob.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
a new keyfob to replace lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.
441
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support
the currently selected
language for the instru-
ment cluster and inform-
ation and entertainment
display.
The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3 SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
442
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest
benefit:
•24 months, unlimited mileage.
•The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
•Hood deflectors.
•Side-window deflectors*.
•Splash guards.
•Spoiler.
Interior Style
•Ambient lighting.
•Door sill plates with logo.
•Floor mats.
•Illuminated door sill plate.
•Rear seat entertainment*.
Lifestyle
•Ash cup or coin holder.
•Camping tent*.
•Cargo area protector.
•Cargo net.
•Cargo organization and management.
•Conversation mirror.
•Roof racks and carriers*.
•Roof rails.
•Seat covers*.
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
•Tablet cradle.
Peace of Mind
•Full vehicle covers*.
•Locking fuel plug.
•Remote start.
•Roadside assistance kits*.
•Vehicle security systems.
•Wheel locks.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
443
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
•An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
•If you or an authorized dealer add any
non-Ford electrical accessories or
components to your vehicle, you may
adversely affect battery performance
and durability. In addition, you may also
adversely affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
444
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
•Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
•Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
445
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
•Windshield wiper blades.
•Spark plugs.
•The clutch disc (if equipped).
•Brake pads and linings.
•Shock absorbers.
•Struts.
•Engine Belts.
•Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
•Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
•Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
•Rental reimbursement.
•Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
•Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
•Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Protect extended
service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
446
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
447
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 250).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
448
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
449
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure2
Fluid levels1; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
450
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1
Change engine oil and filter.2
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints all wheel drive only.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
451
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 250).
Other Maintenance Items 1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change engine coolant. 2
At 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). 4
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2 Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or
50,000 mi (80,000 km).
3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4 If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
452
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).Inspect frequently, service
as required Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change automatic transmission fluid.30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.60,000 mi (96,000 km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.60,000 mi (96,000 km)
Extended Hot and Cold climate operation
Change engine oil and filter.*
5,000 mi (8,000 km)
*Hot Climates only
453
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in off-road (unpaved, sandy, dusty) and Mountainous conditions
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.30,000 mi (48,000 km)
*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 250).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (AWD
only) in your vehicle does not require any
normal scheduled maintenance. The PTU
lubricant will be more likely to require a
fluid change if the vehicle has extended
periods of extreme or severe duty cycle
driving. Changing or checking the PTU
lubricant is not necessary unless the unit
has been submerged in water or shows
signs of leakage. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km).
454
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and
cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
455
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
456
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
457
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
458
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
459
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
460
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
461
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
462
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
463
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
464
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not fasten antenna cables to
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic
modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.
Car
E239120
465
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
466
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
•With the ignition ON.
•With the engine running.
•During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
•You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
467
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
•Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
•Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
468
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
•Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
•Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
•Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
469
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
470
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
•Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
•Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
•Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
•Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
•Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
•Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
•Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
•Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
•Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
•Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
471
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
•You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
•When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
472
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
473
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
•I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
•ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
•iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
474
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
475
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
•Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
•(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
476
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
•TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
•Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
•TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
477
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
•You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
478
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
479
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
480
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
481
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
482
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
483
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
484
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
485
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
486
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
487
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
488
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
489
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
490
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
491
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
492
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
493
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Appendices
494
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................114
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes............................................................175
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................176
Accessories....................................................443
Exterior Style.......................................................443
Interior Style........................................................443
Lifestyle.................................................................443
Peace of Mind.....................................................443
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............190
Active Park Assist..........................................181
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space.................................................................183
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........184
Troubleshooting the System..........................184
Using Active Park Assist...................................182
Adjusting the Headlamps........................260
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................261
Vertical Aim.........................................................260
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................79
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................76
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................75
End of Travel Position.........................................75
Airbag Disposal................................................51
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................114
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............267
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................74
All-Wheel Drive.............................................168
Ambient Lighting...........................................86
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................74
Arming the Alarm.................................................74
Disarming the Alarm...........................................74
Appendices....................................................465
Apps...................................................................412
...................................................................................412
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link....................414
At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............96
Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................96
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................96
Keyless Warning Alert........................................96
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................96
Audio Control...................................................76
MEDIA.......................................................................76
Seek, Next or Previous.........................................77
Audio System.................................................317
General Information...........................................317
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................318
Menu Structure..................................................320
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..................................................323
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD...........................................................324
Autolamps........................................................83
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................83
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD....................115
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System........................116
Automatic Transmission...........................164
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................167
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................166
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................167
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission...................................................164
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission............................164
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................254
Adding Transmission Fluid ............................255
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level...................................................................255
Autowipers.......................................................80
Auxiliary Power Points................................143
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................143
495
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................143
Locations...............................................................143
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................168
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery......................257
Blind Spot Information System..............196
Switching the System Off and On................197
System Errors.......................................................197
System Limitations............................................197
Using the System...............................................196
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..........196
Body Styling Kits..........................................275
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........245
Booster Seats..................................................29
Types of Booster Seats......................................30
Brake Fluid Check........................................256
Brakes................................................................175
General Information...........................................175
Breaking-In......................................................218
Bulb Specification Chart...........................265
C
Cabin Air Filter................................................122
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................308
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates.............................................................311
Specifications.....................................................309
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................312
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................315
Specifications.......................................................313
Capacities and Specifications................302
Cargo Nets.....................................................204
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................268
Catalytic Converter.......................................161
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................162
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................162
Center Console..............................................145
Console Refrigerator and Freezer.................145
Second Row Center Console.........................145
Changing a Bulb............................................261
Brake and Rear Lamps, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reversing Lamp.................264
Front Direction Indicator and Front Parking
Lamp.................................................................262
Front Fog Lamp..................................................263
Headlamp.............................................................262
Headlamp Low Beam and Headlamp High
Beam.................................................................262
LED Lamps...........................................................264
License Plate Lamp..........................................265
Changing a Fuse...........................................243
Fuses.......................................................................243
Changing a Road Wheel...........................296
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................296
Tire Change Procedure....................................297
Changing the 12V Battery..........................257
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................267
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................259
Front Wiper Blades...........................................259
Rear Window Wiper Blade............................260
Checking MyKey System Status..............60
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................259
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................41
Child Restraint Positioning..........................31
Child Safety.......................................................18
General Information.............................................18
Child Safety Locks..........................................32
Left-Hand Side......................................................33
Right-Hand Side...................................................33
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................272
Cleaning Products.......................................268
Materials...............................................................268
Cleaning the Engine....................................270
Cleaning the Exterior..................................268
Cleaning the Headlamps................................269
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................269
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................269
Stripes or Graphics...........................................269
Underbody...........................................................269
Under Hood.........................................................269
496
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................271
Cleaning the Interior.....................................271
Cleaning the Wheels...................................273
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................270
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................59
Climate............................................................396
Climate Control..............................................114
Climate Controlled Seats...........................137
Cooled Seats.........................................................137
Heated Seats........................................................137
Collision Warning System.........................201
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................201
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check...........................250
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......50
Creating a MyKey...........................................58
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................58
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................198
False Alerts..........................................................200
Switching the System Off and On..............200
System Errors.....................................................200
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts..................................................................199
System Limitations..........................................200
Using the System...............................................198
Cruise Control...................................................77
Principle of Operation......................................189
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................189
Customer Assistance..................................227
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps............................84
Direction Indicators.......................................85
Doors and Locks.............................................63
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45
Children and Airbags..........................................46
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................45
Driving Aids.....................................................196
Driving Hints...................................................218
Driving Through Water................................219
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................84
E
Economical Driving......................................218
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............465
Emission Law.................................................160
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance...........161
Tampering With a Noise Control
System..............................................................160
End User License Agreement..................467
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................467
Engine Block Heater.....................................151
Using the Engine Block Heater......................152
Engine Coolant Check...............................250
Adding Coolant....................................................251
Coolant Change..................................................253
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................254
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................253
Recycled Coolant...............................................252
Severe Climates..................................................252
Engine Emission Control...........................160
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................73
Engine Oil Check..........................................249
Adding Engine Oil..............................................249
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................249
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................302
Drivebelt Routing...............................................302
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................302
Drivebelt Routing...............................................303
Entertainment..............................................386
AM/FM Radio......................................................387
Apps.......................................................................395
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................394
CD (If equipped)................................................393
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)........................................................390
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................388
Sources..................................................................387
497
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................395
USB Ports.............................................................395
Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks...........................213
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................215
Hitches....................................................................214
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................216
Safety Chains.......................................................214
Trailer Brake Controller Connector...............214
Trailer Brakes........................................................214
Trailer Lamps........................................................215
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).......................................................213
When Towing a Trailer......................................215
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Exterior Mirrors................................................88
Blind Spot Information System......................89
Direction Indicator Mirrors................................89
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................88
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................89
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................89
Memory Mirrors ....................................................89
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................88
Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................88
Puddle Lamps.......................................................89
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................35
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.....................................37
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................36
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................35
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296
Floor Mats........................................................219
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................85
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................79
Ford Credit..........................................................11
US Only......................................................................11
Ford Protect...................................................445
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................446
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................445
Front Fog Lamps............................................85
Front Passenger Sensing System............46
Fuel and Refueling.......................................153
Fuel Consumption.......................................158
Advertised Capacity..........................................158
Fuel Economy......................................................158
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154
Fuel Quality.....................................................153
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................153
Fuel Shutoff...................................................222
Fuses................................................................234
Fuse Specification Chart..........................234
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel..................................................................239
Power Distribution Box....................................234
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........138
Gauges...............................................................92
Gearbox
See: Transmission..............................................164
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................52
Intelligent Access.................................................52
General Maintenance Information........447
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................449
Owner Checks and Services.........................448
Protecting Your Investment...........................447
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................447
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................447
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................230
Getting the Services You Need...............227
Away From Home..............................................227
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................176
Hazard Flashers............................................222
498
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps....................260
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................84
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp...........................261
Headrest
See: Head Restraints.........................................123
Head Restraints.............................................123
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................124
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................125
Heated Seats.................................................136
Front Seats............................................................136
Second Row Heated Seats.............................136
Heated Steering Wheel................................77
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................121
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................121
Heated Rear Window.........................................121
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................114
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................118
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................120
General Hints........................................................118
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................119
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................119
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........120
Recommended Settings for Heating...........119
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................176
Home Screen.................................................377
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........245
I
Ignition Switch...............................................147
In California (U.S. Only).............................228
Information Display Control........................77
Information Displays.....................................97
General Information............................................97
Information Messages................................105
Adaptive Cruise Control..................................106
AdvanceTrac™....................................................106
Alarm......................................................................106
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................106
AWD.........................................................................107
Battery and Charging System........................107
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System...................................................108
Brake System.......................................................108
Collision Warning System...............................109
Doors and Locks.................................................109
Fuel..........................................................................109
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................110
Maintenance.........................................................110
MyKey........................................................................111
Park Aid.....................................................................111
Power Steering......................................................112
Seats.........................................................................112
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................112
Towing......................................................................113
Traction Control....................................................113
Transmission.........................................................113
Installing Child Restraints............................19
Child Seats...............................................................19
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................25
Using Tether Straps.............................................27
Instrument Cluster.........................................92
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................84
Instrument Panel Overview........................16
Interior Lamps.................................................85
Second Row Reading Lamps..........................85
Third Row Dome Lamps...................................86
Interior Mirror...................................................90
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................90
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................223
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................223
Jump Starting......................................................224
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................223
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................224
K
Keyless Entry...................................................66
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad................................................................66
Keyless Starting.............................................147
Ignition Modes.....................................................148
Keys and Remote Controls.........................52
499
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
L
Liftgate...............................................................69
Lighting Control..............................................82
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............83
Headlamp High Beam........................................82
Lighting..............................................................82
General Information............................................82
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............204
Load Carrying................................................204
Load Limit......................................................204
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................209
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................204
Locking and Unlocking.................................63
Activating Intelligent Access...........................64
Autolock..................................................................65
Autounlock ............................................................65
Battery Saver.........................................................66
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock.................65
Illuminated Entry..................................................66
Illuminated Exit.....................................................66
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade............................................................63
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside..........64
Power Door Locks................................................63
Remote Control....................................................63
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................64
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................65
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296
M
Maintenance..................................................245
General Information.........................................245
Manual Climate Control..............................114
Manual Liftgate..............................................69
Closing the Liftgate.............................................69
Opening the Liftgate...........................................69
Manual Seats.................................................126
Lumbar Adjustment..........................................126
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................126
Recline Adjustment...........................................126
Memory Function.........................................128
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................129
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
..............................................................................129
Saving a PreSet Position.................................128
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................97
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................121
See: Windows and Mirrors................................87
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof..........................................................90
Bounce-Back..........................................................91
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...............91
Venting the Moonroof.........................................91
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............303
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................305
MyKey Troubleshooting................................61
MyKey™.............................................................57
Principle of Operation.........................................57
N
Navigation.....................................................404
cityseeker................................................................411
Destination Mode.............................................406
Map Mode............................................................404
Navigation Map Updates.................................412
Navigation Menu...............................................409
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link....................412
SYNC AppLink......................................................411
Waypoints.............................................................410
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........450
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................450
Normal Maintenance Intervals......................451
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................250
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................249
Opening and Closing the Hood..............245
Closing the Hood...............................................246
500
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
Opening the Hood.............................................245
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................232
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........232
Overhead Console.......................................146
P
Parking Aids...................................................180
Principle of Operation......................................180
Parking Brake..................................................176
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................73
SecuriLock®...........................................................73
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................73
Pedals.................................................................79
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................43
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................43
Phone..............................................................399
During a Phone Call..........................................402
Making Calls.........................................................401
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................399
Phone Menu.......................................................400
Receiving Calls...................................................402
Smartphone Connectivity.............................403
Text Messaging..................................................403
Post-Crash Alert System..........................225
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................63
Power Liftgate.................................................70
Obstacle Detection...............................................71
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................70
Stopping the Liftgate Movement....................71
Power Seats....................................................126
Power Lumbar.....................................................128
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................257
Power Windows..............................................87
Accessory Delay....................................................87
Bounce-Back.........................................................87
One-Touch Down.................................................87
One-Touch Up.......................................................87
Window Lock.........................................................87
Protecting the Environment........................15
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296
R
Rear Parking Aid...........................................180
Rear Passenger Climate Controls..........120
Rear Seats.......................................................129
Adjusting the Rear Seats.................................129
Rear View Camera.......................................185
Using the Rear View Camera System.........186
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................185
Rear Window Wiper and Washers............81
Rear Camera Washer...........................................81
Rear Window Washer..........................................81
Rear Window Wiper Blade................................81
Recommended Towing Weights..............211
Refueling..........................................................156
Refueling System Overview...........................156
Refueling System Warning.............................158
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................156
Remote Control..............................................53
Car Finder................................................................55
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................53
Intelligent Access Key.........................................53
Memory Feature...................................................56
Remote Start.........................................................55
Replacing the Battery.........................................54
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................55
Remote Start..................................................122
Automatic Settings............................................122
Removing a Headlamp...............................261
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............273
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................56
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................232
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................232
Roadside Assistance...................................221
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................222
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage.................222
501
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................222
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................221
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................221
Roadside Emergencies...............................221
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................204
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................218
Running Out of Fuel....................................154
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................155
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................154
S
Safety Canopy™............................................49
Safety Precautions.......................................153
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........455
Scheduled Maintenance...........................447
Seatbelt Extension.........................................41
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38
Seatbelt Reminder........................................39
Belt-Minder™........................................................39
Seatbelts...........................................................34
Principle of Operation........................................34
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................39
Conditions of operation.....................................39
Seats..................................................................123
Security...............................................................73
Settings............................................................415
911 Assist...............................................................420
Ambient Lighting................................................427
Bluetooth...............................................................417
Clock........................................................................417
Display...................................................................428
General..................................................................425
Media Player.........................................................416
Mobile Apps.........................................................424
Navigation.............................................................422
Phone......................................................................417
Radio.......................................................................421
SiriusXM................................................................422
Sound......................................................................415
Valet Mode...........................................................429
Vehicle...................................................................428
Voice Control.......................................................429
Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................426
Side Airbags.....................................................48
Sitting in the Correct Position..................123
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................292
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................453
Exceptions............................................................454
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................189
Stability Control............................................178
Principle of Operation.......................................178
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................148
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................150
Failure to Start.....................................................150
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................151
Important Ventilating Information................151
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.................................................................151
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................150
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................148
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................149
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........147
General Information...........................................147
Steering............................................................201
Electric Power Steering....................................201
Steering Wheel................................................75
Storage Compartments.............................145
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................90
Sun Visors.........................................................90
Illuminated Vanity Mirror..................................90
Supplementary Restraints System.........44
Principle of Operation........................................44
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3........................................................365
General Information.........................................365
502
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................430
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................344
911 Assist...............................................................344
SYNC™ AppLink™.....................................346
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................346
SYNC™............................................................326
General Information.........................................326
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................357
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............302
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................229
Tire Care..........................................................278
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................280
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................278
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................281
Temperature A B C............................................279
Traction AA A B C...............................................279
Treadwear.............................................................279
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........293
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................294
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................294
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................276
Towing a Trailer.............................................210
Load Placement.................................................210
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................216
Emergency Towing.............................................216
Recreational Towing..........................................216
Towing..............................................................210
Traction Control.............................................177
Principle of Operation........................................177
Trailer Sway Control......................................211
Transmission Code Designation............307
Transmission..................................................164
Transporting the Vehicle...........................225
U
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................246
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................247
Universal Garage Door Opener...............138
HomeLink Wireless Control System...........138
USB Port..........................................................325
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................190
Automatic Cancellation...................................193
Blocked Sensor...................................................194
Canceling the Set Speed.................................193
Changing the Set Speed..................................193
Detection Issues..................................................193
Following a Vehicle.............................................191
Hilly Condition Usage........................................193
Overriding the Set Speed................................192
Resuming the Set Speed.................................193
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............191
Setting the Gap Distance................................192
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................193
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................190
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............195
System Not Available.......................................194
Using All-Wheel Drive................................168
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................170
Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched
Tires....................................................................169
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires....................................................................169
Using Cruise Control...................................189
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................189
Switching Cruise Control On..........................189
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................61
Using Snow Chains.....................................292
Using Stability Control................................179
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................347
Accessing Your Play Menu..............................352
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port...........................................................347
Media Menu Features......................................350
Media Voice Commands................................349
503
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
System Settings.................................................354
What's Playing?.................................................349
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............331
Accessing Features Through the Phone
Menu..................................................................335
Accessing Your Phone Settings...................339
Making a Call.......................................................334
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................331
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................332
Phone Options during an Active Call.........334
Phone Voice Commands................................332
Receiving Calls....................................................334
System Settings..................................................341
Text Messaging...................................................337
Using Traction Control.................................177
Switching the System Off................................177
System Indicator Lights and
Messages...........................................................177
Using a Switch......................................................177
Using the Information Display
Controls..............................................................177
Using Voice Recognition...........................328
Audio Voice Commands.................................380
Climate Voice Commands..............................381
Initiating a Voice Session................................328
Mobile App Voice Commands......................384
Navigation Voice Commands.......................383
Phone Voice Commands.................................381
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................384
System Interaction and Feedback..............329
Voice Settings Commands............................385
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................230
V
Vehicle Care...................................................268
General Information.........................................268
Vehicle Certification Label.......................307
Vehicle Identification Number...............306
Vehicle Storage.............................................273
Battery....................................................................274
Body........................................................................273
Brakes.....................................................................274
Cooling system....................................................274
Engine.....................................................................274
Fuel system..........................................................274
General...................................................................273
Miscellaneous......................................................274
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................274
Tires.........................................................................274
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................114
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...........306
Voice Control....................................................77
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................93
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................93
Airbag Readiness.................................................94
Anti-Lock Braking System................................94
Battery......................................................................94
Brake System.........................................................94
Charging System..................................................94
Cruise Control........................................................94
Directional Indicator...........................................94
Door Ajar.................................................................94
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................94
Engine Oil................................................................95
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp.....................95
Front Airbag...........................................................95
Front Fog Lamps..................................................95
Head Up Display...................................................95
High Beam..............................................................95
Liftgate Ajar............................................................95
Low Fuel Level.......................................................95
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................95
Low Washer Fluid.................................................95
Parking Lamps......................................................95
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power..................................................................96
Service Engine Soon...........................................96
Stability Control...................................................96
Stability Control Off............................................96
Washer Fluid Check.....................................257
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................268
See: Wipers and Washers.................................80
Waxing.............................................................270
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296
504
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index
Wheels and Tires.........................................276
General Information..........................................276
Technical Specifications................................300
Windows and Mirrors....................................87
Windshield Washers......................................81
Windshield Wipers........................................80
Speed Dependent Wipers................................80
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................259
Wipers and Washers....................................80
505
Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing
Index

Navigation menu